JP2023053004A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's degree of attention to a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: electric accessories 37a1, 37a2 that can hold multiple game balls flowing down a game area, and has an open state for allowing game balls to enter a right operation hole 37B and a closed state for preventing entry of game balls flowing down the game area into the right operation hole 37B; and electric accessory drive parts 37b1, 37b2 for setting to the open state or the closed state by driving the electric accessories 37a1, 37a2. The electric accessory drive parts 37b1, 37b2 release the remaining game balls held by the electric accessories 37a1, 37a2 by setting the electric accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the closed state on the basis of entry of game balls into the right operation hole 37B after setting the electric accessories 37a1, 37a2 to the open state. The game machine includes holding amount adjustment means for adjusting the amount of game balls to be held by the electric accessories 37a1, 37a2.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

The gaming machine of the present invention comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area entering the game ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball. a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means; A gaming machine comprising a variable prize winning device that shifts to a state in which game balls can enter when shifting to a specific control state, wherein the lottery means can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and the lottery is performed. A guide piece having an open state for entering the means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means, and a guide piece drive for setting the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece. The variable winning device comprises a large winning opening that pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters, an open state that allows the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the big winning opening, and a game area. The opening/closing door has a closed state that does not allow the falling game ball to enter, and is set to the open state or the closed state by driving the opening/closing door located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the guide piece. A variable winning driving part is provided, and the guide piece driving part sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece and playing the game. The machine is characterized by comprising holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of game balls held by the guide pieces.

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, a gaming machine can increase the attention of a player to a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board A front view of the game board with the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device enlarged Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing A diagram showing a flow chart of display duration setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable prize winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flowchart of game ball counting processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process at the time of closing After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the result of winning becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " A diagram showing the right operation port, variable winning device, and pattern display device when 50” is set After shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the win-or-loss result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small hit is " A diagram showing the right operation port, variable winning device, and pattern display device when 50” is set After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the result of winning becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " 200" is set, the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing A diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support After shifting to the high probability mode, the winning result becomes a "special loss result", and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when winning the upper electric accessory lottery After shifting to the high probability mode, the win/fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right actuation opening and a variable winning device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device After shifting to the high-probability mode, the win-or-fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the game ball wins the big winning opening. After shifting to the high-probability mode, the win-or-fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the game ball does not win the big winning opening. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right actuation opening and a variable winning device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. A diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable prize winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode.

[First embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted into the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion 23, and includes speaker units 24 for outputting sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided in the central portion of the upper plate 25a. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5). It has the function of guiding. The push button 25b functions as an operation means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, a central operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a right operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 has a detection sensor 40a, the central working opening 36 has a detecting sensor 40b, the right working opening 37 has a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detecting sensor 40d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the central operating port 36 and when a ball enters the right operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31 . The central operation port 36 is provided so as to open upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can be entered. The right operation port 37 is provided so as to open rightward so that the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. ing.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a is inclined downward toward the right operating port 37, and is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the electric accessory 37a is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37 so that the right operation opening 37 is closed. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37 and opening the right operation opening 37. be.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.
In addition, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along the plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. will do.
At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37, and when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the right operation opening 37 can win a prize.

The game board 31 has a right outlet 391 provided on the right side of the electric accessory 37a. This right outlet 391 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by performing router processing. Also, the right outlet 391 has the same function as the outlet 39 provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31 . Specifically, the game ball entering the right out port 391 joins the game ball entering the out port 39, and is then detected by the detection sensor 40e provided on the back side of the game board 31. It's like

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning driving unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. panel 381b (see FIG. 2).
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened. Here, when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state, the game ball flows down to the out port 39 side along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. I will go. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a flat shape, the game ball is less likely to flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. As a result, the water immediately flows down to the out port 39 side without taking much time.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a, and retreats toward the inside of the game board 31 to play the game. By being buried in the board 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the big prize opening 38a is opened.
On the other hand, the opening/closing door may employ a configuration other than this. For example, the opening/closing door may be formed in the shape of a rectangular plate, and may be provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable about one side on the lower side as a central axis. In this case, the opening/closing door rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby opening the opening of the big winning opening 38a and rotating toward the inside of the game board 31. By moving and being buried in the game board 31, it is only necessary to have a closed state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is closed.

The main display device 42, as shown in FIG. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the central operating port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the right operating port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the central working opening 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central working opening 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the right operation opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the right operation opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when a game ball enters. do.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right operation port 37 functions as a lottery means for executing an internal lottery upon entry of a game ball while allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. This right operating port 37 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, is in an open state for entering the right operating port 37, and is closed so as not to enter the right operating port 37 with game balls flowing down the game region. It has an electric accessory 37a (guide piece) having a state and an electric accessory drive section 37b (guide piece drive section) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the electric accessory 37a.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp portion 49a is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved games. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the right operation opening 37, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from the start of variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a sorting table storage area 63b, a reach table storage area 63c, and a display duration table storage area 63d. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 are an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f correspond to the general winning opening 35, the central working opening 36, the right working opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41 on a one-to-one basis. is provided. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37 is to be in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the central operation port 36. store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, when the winning to the central operation port 36 occurs a plurality of times in a row, the MPU 62, first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 in order of hold information. Store in chronological order.

As described above, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section has four storage areas, so that up to four winnings of game balls to the central operation opening 36 are reserved. In addition, the first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the central working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the right operation port 37 in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the right operation opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the right operation opening 37 are reserved. The second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserved pieces related to the right operation port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of allowing game balls to enter the right actuation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the right operation opening 37 than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player left-handedly hits the firing handle 27 with a medium amount of rotational operation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed as the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the lateral side to the central portion, the probability of winning the central working opening 36 rather than the right working opening 37 can be increased. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27 set to the maximum, and the position where the game ball reaches in the upper part of the game area is the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from one side to the opposite side, the odds of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can easily cause game balls to enter the central operating port 36 and can hardly cause game balls to enter the right operating port 37. 1 route), and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the right operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the central operating port 36. there is

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transmitted through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. , the number of random number values for the "special outlier result" is two, and the random number value for the "normal outlier result" is another value. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of the success/failure results being "big win winning" and "special losing result" is 1/300, respectively. The probability that the hit/fail result is the “normal result” is 298/300.

On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success/failure table is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. , there are 28 random number values that result in a "normal outlier result", and the random number values that result in a "special outlier result" are other values. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability that the win/loss result will be a "big win" is about 1/30, and the win/fail result will be a "special loss". The probability of a "outcome" is about 11/12, and the probability of a hit/fail result being an "abnormal result" is about 1/20.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the central operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8A, includes "low probability result (special distribution result for low probability)", "explicit small round high probability result (high probability result for small round)". , and a plurality of distribution results of "best result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “explicit small rounds "High Probability Result" and "20 to 29" are assigned to "Most Favorable Result".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the right operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8(b), has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "best result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "explicitly small round high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the winning/failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has entered the central operating port 36, and the game ball has entered the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores values of random numbers related to occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 5).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the effective line L. In addition, if it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or if it is not a "big winning lottery" in the winning lottery, it will be a "special missing result". In this case, the symbol display device 47 has, as a stop result, not a combination of symbols having the same number, but different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normal result" in the winning lottery. A combination of special symbols is stop-displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "express small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, In the case where the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "special loss result"), this does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, Players can be expected to be sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and some of the symbol rows are displayed stationary and the rest of the symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning holes detect the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is a specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the central operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered the central operating port 36 (start winning). determine whether
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the central operation port 36, in step S202, it grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, and reserves the number of balls. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the central operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the right operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the right operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the right operating opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the right operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN.

In step S205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S206, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right operation opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory The accessory 37a is set to the closed state. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S206, or when it is determined in step S205 that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 suspends the start set in step S202 or step S204 in step S207. It is determined whether or not the memory number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S208, the value of the start pending memory number N is updated by adding 1 to it.

In step S209, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the result display holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, ie, the storage area corresponding to the number N of start suspension storage updated in step S208.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S208. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores the data in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as pending information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display portion pending area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S208. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S209, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36 or the right operation opening 37 is a maximum of four, and the first reservation lamp part 49a or the second reservation lamp part 49b The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 seconds) for starting a demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game round while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes electric support processing for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the right actuation port 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Then, after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning in the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory drive unit 37b is driven. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has been set, the MPU 62 executes power failure processing from step S312 onward without executing the processing from step S309 onward. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502 it determines whether the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed for setting the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37, the operation to the central operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so when the game round is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the central operation opening 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the central operation opening 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the right operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift-time command indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the number of lights of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls winning the right operation opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the processing (processing after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the central operation opening 36 starts a variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is an "explicit small round high probability result" , the explicit few-round high-probability result flag is set, and if the "most favorable result" is specified, the most favorable result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result" by referring to this special loss flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a display duration setting process.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a special out flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing after step S806.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined that the special out flag is not set in the RAM 64 by the MPU 62 in step S801 will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. FIG.

In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 47. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the ready-to-win display occurs, in step S804, it reads the display duration table for reach-to-win occurrence generation stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the reach display does not occur, in step S805, the display duration table for reach non-occurrence stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 read out.

Next, processing (processing after step S806) when the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S801 will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.

When the MPU 62 determines that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode in step S806 (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), it executes the processes after step S802 described above.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. read out.

After executing any of steps S804, S805, and S807, the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time in step S808. Specifically, when the MPU 62 reads the reach occurrence display duration table or the reach non-occurrence display duration table, by referring to each display duration table, the MPU 62 acquires from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64. When the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 .
Note that the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

Here, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the central working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the central working port 36 increases. The display duration time for consuming the pending information related to the right operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of pending items related to the right operating port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing, the processing after step S717 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In addition, since the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table, based on the information related to the display duration Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the display duration is the special display duration in the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes the special display duration information. Note that the variation command may directly include information on the duration of the special display.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "low probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "best result" as information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated to behave in the same manner as when winning a lottery for generating a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S914.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S903 whether the success/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success/failure result is a "special failure result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S905.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S911.

First, the processing (processing after step S905) when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S905, the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores a waiting time (waiting time) for starting a small hit. period) is set to "50". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for starting the small winning is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S908, the MPU 62 sets a small winning command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the small winning command set in step S908 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), in step S909, the various counters in the RAM 64 A timer counter T provided in the area 64a is set to "1000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

At step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S911) when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is not the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a low-round high-probability result (“explicit low-round high-probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S912 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "best result", step At S913, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning opening 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing the process of step S912 or step S913, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S909 described above.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of the type of the game result, except for the special loss result in the high-probability mode. A waiting time for opening is set in the timer counter T.
In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result, except for the special loss result in the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

Next, the processing (processing after step S914) when it is determined that the MPU 62 is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S901 will be described.
In step S914, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1025 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing (processing after step S1002) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1003, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1004, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "1" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1104, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1105, the distribution result is a low-round high-probability result (“explicit low-round high-probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1107. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning result is not the "special losing result", as described above, the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby allowing the game to enter the big winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total winning number of balls is set to eight.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result", as described above, the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "1", so that the winning opening 38a is entered. The upper limit of the total winning number of game balls is set to one. The upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls (more specifically, shorter than the shooting cycle of the game balls. short), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1005, after performing the big winning a prize opening process of step S1004. This release command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information related to the number of executions of the round game. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1006) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1007.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1018.

First, the processing (processing after step S1007) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been won in the big prize opening 38a, in step S1008, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the prize winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1010 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. This close command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closing command includes information related to the number of round game executions. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it sets the value of the open/close counter SOC to "0", and then executes the processes after step S1024, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1013 onward.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening, irrespective of the type of game result except for the special loss result in the high probability mode. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode, except for the special failure result in the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1018) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, when it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1021 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1023 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S1021) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, the process (process after step S1023) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. Here, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", or after executing step S1023, the MPU 62 executes step S1024.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1025 it determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. .

When the MPU 62 determines that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode in step S1025 (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. In other words, the waiting time for the ending is 0 sec in the special loss result of the high probability mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S915 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S914, the MPU 62 checks in step S915 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S916 the value of the timer counter T is set to " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S917, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1209 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds", it executes the processing from step S1205.

First, the processing (processing after step S1202) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, explicit small round high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the allocation result ) or clear the special out flag. In addition, step S205 of the winning process for the operation opening described above, step S701 of the fluctuation start process, step S806 of the display duration setting process, step S906 of the game state transition process, and step S906 of the big winning opening opening/closing process. In S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1205) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1206.

In step S1206, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

In step S1207, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
In step S1209, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 as a trigger, It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the opening/closing execution mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination processing will be described later in detail.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2103, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2104, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal failure result", that is, when the game result is either the "special failure result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", step S2105 , the common pattern determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2103, S2105 and S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the processing of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2109 onward.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, in step S2110 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when it is determined in step S2110 that the game result is the “special loss result”. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S2112, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the small winning command is received.

MPU92 performs the process after step S2116, when it determines with having not received the small hit command in step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the small hit command is received, in step S2114, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining a small hit effect. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command related to the small hit effect determined in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114. And MPU92 memorize|stores a small hit production|presentation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of RAM94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the small winning effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a small winning effect.

MPU92 performs the process after step S2116, after performing the process of step S2115, or when it determines with having not received the small hit command in step S2113.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure results" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in columns and the game states, etc. are arranged in rows.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. Result", and a sorting result of "Low Probability Result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 24, the "special losing result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In addition, in the "special failure result" of the low probability mode, the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is effect A, and in the "special failure result" of the high probability mode, the stop. The result is a combination of special symbols, and a small win performance instead of the performance for the open/close execution mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the effect for the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in a "most advantageous result", if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the symbol display device 47 will display the game result. disguised as if it was a "low-probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result becomes the "special loss result" after shifting to the high-probability mode.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 25, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to inform the result of the lottery (Fig. 25 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 25(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 25(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 25(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 25(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 25(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
25C, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a (Fig. 25(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. , the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to a closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the remaining plurality of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning, so that the player can Attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a can hold 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. designed to be able to

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 25(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning drive section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a, Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive section 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, a predetermined game ball can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(2) Since the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, it is released from the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 freely falls toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.
(3) After setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the variable prize winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big prize winning opening 38a, and sets the door 38b to the closed state. The object 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 can: More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the big winning hole 38a, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and the waiting time for the start of the small winning are set. When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large prize winning port 38a to the open state, and the vertical distance between the electric role product 37a and the large prize winning port 38a changes the electric role product 37a to the closed state. It was set so that when the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, it reaches the big winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and the start of the small hit When the total waiting time has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to an open state, and adjusts the waiting time for starting the small win. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
As in the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving portion 37b, and, as shown in FIG. and a passage sensor 372 provided on the right side of the guardrail 371 .

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end in contact with the upper right end of the right operation opening 37 and inclined downward toward the right operation opening 37 . A guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. A guard rail 371 is fixed so as to protrude from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 . Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation opening The ball flows down toward the out hole 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The passage sensor 372 is a sensor that detects passage of a game ball, and is provided on the game board 31 along the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to the right end of the guardrail 371 . The width of the passage sensor 372 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the passage sensor 372, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the drawing is detected by the passage sensor 372, and then detected vertically above the electric accessory 37a. The water flows down along the plate surface on the side and the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. In other words, the passage sensor 372 detects the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. The passage sensor 372 may be of any type as long as it can individually detect the passage of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 27, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a and various counter areas 94b.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. Also, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b and the passing sensor 372 . The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the winning process for the activation opening, the normal process, and the game state transition process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the operation opening, the normal process, and the game state transition process in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flow chart of winning processing for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 28, the process of step S206A is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206A, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory The accessory 37a is set to the closed state.

Here, in this embodiment, in step S206A, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, and then sets the electric closing command. This electric closing command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the electrical closing command set in step S206A to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state based on the electrical closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 29, the process of step S306A is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306A, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation port 37. FIG. In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Then, after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning in the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory drive unit 37b is driven. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state.
Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery in step S306A, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. After that, set the power release command. This electric role release command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state. The MPU 62 transmits to the audio light emission control device 90 the electrical opening command set in step S306A in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state based on the electric role opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 30, steps S907A and S908A are executed instead of steps S907 and S908.

In step S907A, the MPU 62 executes a waiting time setting process for starting a small winning. In the process of setting the waiting time for starting the small hit, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of 50% as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small win. is set, and "200" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of remaining 50% as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small win. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec or 0.4 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for starting the small winning is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit with a probability of 50%. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 may be set to "50" as a waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit with a different probability.

In step S908A, the MPU 62 sets a small winning command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This small winning command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and information on the waiting time for starting the small winning. The MPU 62 transmits the small winning command set in step S908A to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, in this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, timer interrupt processing and effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the timer interrupt processing and effect determination processing in this embodiment will be described.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
In timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 90, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 executes the game ball counting process of step S2006A after executing the process of step S2001 and before executing the process of step S2002. Differs from one embodiment.

In step S2006A, the MPU 92 executes game ball counting processing. In this game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372 after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. In other words, in the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.
The game ball counting process will be described in detail below.

<Game ball counting process>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game ball counting processing.
In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received an electrical release command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has received the electric power release command, in step S2202 the value of the passage counter PTC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is cleared by substituting 0. do. After that, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process. Here, the value of the passing counter PTC indicates the number of game balls detected by the passing sensor 372 . Therefore, when the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the MPU 92 resets and initializes the value of the passage counter PTC.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the electrical opening command, it reads the state of the passage sensor 372 in step S2203, determines the state, and uses it as passage detection information. Store in RAM 94 . Then, based on the detection result of the passage sensor 372 stored in the RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball has been detected.

When the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball has been detected in step S2203, it adds 1 to the value of the passage counter PTC and updates it in step S2204.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the passage of the game ball has not been detected, it ends the game ball counting process.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
In effect determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2114A and S2115A instead of the processes of steps S2114 and S2115. It is different from the first embodiment in that the closing effect determination process is executed.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes small winning effect determination processing. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the setting processing of the waiting time for starting the small winning in step S907A, the short-term waiting time production is changed to the small winning production. , and when "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the long waiting time performance is selected as the small winning performance.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2115A, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command including information related to the short-term standby time effect or long-term standby time effect selected in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114A. And MPU92 memorize|stores a small hit production|presentation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of RAM94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the short-term waiting time effect or the long-term waiting time effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a short-term standby time effect or a long-term standby time effect.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes closing effect determination processing. In this closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines a closing effect to be executed when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
In the following, the closing effect determination processing will be described in detail.

<Production decision processing at the time of closing>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing at the time of closing.
In the closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received an electrical closing command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has received the power closing command, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the value of the passage counter PTC is "3" or more.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is "3" or more, in step S2303, it executes high-expectation effect determination processing.
In this high-expectation-level effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the high-expectation-level effect by referring to a performance table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2304, the MPU 92 sets a high-expectation-level effect command related to the high-expectation-level effect determined in the high-expectation-level effect determination processing in step S2304. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the high expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. - 特許庁
This high-expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the high-expectation effect in the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a high-expectation effect.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is not "3" or more (if it determines that the value of the passage counter PTC is less than "3"), then step S2305 , the process of determining the low-expectation effect is executed. In this low-expectation-degree effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the low-expectation-degree effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 sets a low-expectation-degree effect command related to the low-expectation-degree effect determined in the process of determining the low-expectation-degree effect in step S2305. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the low expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 .
This low-expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the low expectation performance in the pattern display device 47 based on the low expectation performance command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the low-expectation effect.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
In FIG. 35, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time) It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 35, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to inform the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 35 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 35(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 35(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 35(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 35(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and prompts the player with the character's line "Attention!" It informs that there is a high expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a.

It should be noted that, if the predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball entering the right actuation opening 37, the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has not received the electric closing command. The production (high-expectation-level production and low-expectation-level production) is not executed.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 35(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
35(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102 receives a short-term Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time presentation, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the character's line "You did it!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time presentation informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the prize at the big prize winning opening 38a.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessary 37a, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 35(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 35(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

In FIG. 36, after shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 36, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "best result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 36 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 36(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 36(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 36(A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 36(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.

Here, as described above, since there are two game balls (B1, B2) running on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "2".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the low-expectation effect determination process of step S2305 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the low-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "Attention!" The low expectation of winning is reported to the winning opening 38a.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 36(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
36(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small hit, so the MPU 102 receives a short-term Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time presentation, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the character's line "You did it!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time presentation informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the prize at the big prize winning opening 38a.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a is It passes through the electric accessary 37a, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 36(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 36(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

In FIG. 37, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time) It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "200" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 37, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 37 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 37(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 37(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 37(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 37(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and prompts the player with the character's line "Attention!" It informs that there is a high expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 37(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
37(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102, based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, long-term Execute the waiting time production. In the long standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 and displays the character's line "I'm sorry!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the closed big prize opening 38a. As a result, the long standby time effect informs the player that the expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a is low.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.4 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.5 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessary 37a and falls so that it cannot win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 37(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 opens the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 37(D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls to enter the big winning hole 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released.
Further, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the variable winning drive section 38c moves the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so that the ball can be entered at
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the variable winning drive unit 38c moves the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to a large size. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as not to let the ball enter the prize winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a; A second opening timing is provided for setting the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so as not to allow the game ball B2 released from the accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so as to allow the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and the big winning. Since the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth 38a, the player is released from the electric accessory 37a. The player pays attention to whether or not the game ball B2 that has been played enters the big winning hole 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first opening timing is, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and Although it is set when about 0.2 sec, which is the total time of waiting time for starting a small hit, has passed, it may be set when time other than this has passed. In short, the first opening timing can be set so that the opening/closing door 38b can be set to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second opening timing is, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and Although it is set when about 0.5 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting a small hit, has passed, it may be set when other time has passed. In short, in the second opening timing, the opening/closing door 38b can be set to the open state so as not to allow the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In the pachinko machine 10, after the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, the relay period (special display A setting process (period adjusting means) of waiting time for starting a small hit in step S907A for adjusting the duration time and waiting time for starting a small hit is provided.
According to this, after the player sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, during the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c will pay attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the period adjusting means selects one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing to adjust the relay period. You may choose to adjust the relay period, or you may set a random time to adjust the relay period.
Further, in the present embodiment, the period adjustment means adjusts the standby time for starting the small winning, and after setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state in the electric role product driving unit 37b, the variable prize driving unit 38c , the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state is adjusted. By adjusting the distance, etc., the relay period may be adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the variable winning drive unit 38c causes the electric accessory drive unit 37b to The opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at the timing when the door 37a is set to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive section 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when closing effect determination processing in step S2117A, when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, a predetermined effect (closed effect) is executed. It functions as time production executing means.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with effect determination processing at step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. For example, after the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product drive unit 37b, the player can perform a predetermined effect to determine whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. can be notified to Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high expectation effect is achieved by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, thereby increasing the number of game balls more than a predetermined number (one in this embodiment). When there is a high degree of expectation that the ball will enter the big winning hole 38a (when the player will be in an advantageous state), it functions as an advantageous state notification performance for notifying the player that the state will be advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the low-expectation performance is achieved by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, thereby allowing more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the big winning opening 38a. It functions as a disadvantageous state notification performance for notifying the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state when the degree of expectation for the player is low (when the player is in a disadvantageous state).

According to this, the effect determination process at the time of step S2117A sets the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, and when the state becomes advantageous for the player, When the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing a high-expectation performance for informing the player of the advantageous state and setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b. In addition, since a low-expectation effect is executed to inform the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, the player should pay attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the closing effect executing means stores information (expectation) regarding whether or not more game balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) enter the big winning opening 38a. Although the player is notified, it may be configured to notify the player of information other than this. For example, the closing effect executing means may notify the player of information regarding whether or not the game ball can enter the big winning opening 38a. In this case, the effect execution means at the time of closing, based on information such as the number of game balls running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the waiting time for the start of the small hit, and the duration of the special display, the game ball can be entered into the big winning hole 38a.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(4) The pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning hole 38a, and the big winning hole 38a. Since the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the player can play the game released from the electric accessory 37a. Attention is paid to whether or not the ball B2 enters the big winning hole 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a. In the pachinko machine 10, after the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, the relay period (special display The total time of the duration and the waiting time for the start of the small winning) is provided in step S907A for setting the waiting time for starting the small winning (period adjusting means). After the electric accessary 37a is set to the closed state by 37b, the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning driving unit 38c will be noted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a closing effect determination process in step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. , After setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player is notified whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player by executing a predetermined effect. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(7) The effect determination process at the time of closing in step S2117A is an advantageous state for the player by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b. By executing a high-expectation effect that notifies the player of the state, and setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, Since the low-expectation-level effect is executed to inform the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. .
(8) In the closing effect determination process of step S2117A, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, thereby allowing more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the big winning opening 38a. When the degree of expectation to be made is high, a high expectation performance is executed, and by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory driving part 37b, more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening 38a. Since the low-expectation effect is executed when the degree of expectation for the ball to be entered is low, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination processing in step S2117A.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. was
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the right operation port 37B is a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. ), and a lower electric accessory 37a2 as a guide piece (support piece) arranged vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and constituted by a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece. It differs from the first embodiment in that it has

In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37B avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The upper electric accessory 37a1 is provided with an inclination so as to descend toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to an upper electric accessory driving portion 37b1 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1. be. The closed state is a state in which the upper electric accessory 37a1 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37B, thereby closing the right operation opening 37B. The open state is a state in which the upper electric accessory 37a1 is advanced toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37B and opening the right operation opening 37B. is.

The lower electric accessory 37a2 is provided inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to the lower electric accessory driving portion 37b2 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. . The lower electric accessory 37a2 is driven by the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 to be in either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state). set. The closed state is a state in which the right operation opening 37B is closed by retracting the lower electric accessory 37a2 toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37B. In the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is advanced toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37B, thereby opening the right operation opening 37B. state.

Here, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls. It will be.
In addition, when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. I will enter the ball. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. become.
In addition, when the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state, the game ball tilts the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2. The ball is used and enters the right operation opening 37B along this plate surface. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time.
Therefore, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37B, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory When the accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, it is possible to win the right operation opening 37B.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the open state or may be set to the closed state.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an upper electric accessory driving portion 37b1 that opens and closes the upper electric accessory 37a1 of the right operating port 37B, and a lower electric accessory driving portion 37b1 that opens and closes the lower electric accessory 37a2 of the right operating port 37B. It is connected to the item driving section 37b2, the variable winning driving section 38c that opens and closes the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the prize winning process and the normal process for the working opening are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the prize winning process and the normal process for the operating port in this embodiment will be described below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 40, the process of step S206B is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206B, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 to drive both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Set to closed state. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 41, instead of the process of step S306, the process of step S306B for electric support is executed.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right actuation port 37B.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 executes an electric role release lottery based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64. FIG.

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory open lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the electric accessary product open lottery has not been won, it executes the processing after step S1307.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the electric accessory open lottery is won in step S1302, the upper electric accessory lottery is executed in step S1303. In this upper electric accessory lottery, it is determined whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state when the electric accessory open lottery is won. Specifically, in the upper electric accessory lottery, there is a 50% probability of winning, and the remaining 50% probability of non-winning.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory lottery is won with a probability of 50%, but it may be won with a probability different from 50%.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper electric accessory lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines that the upper electric auditors lottery is won at step S1304, at step S1305, the upper electric auditors open execution process is executed. In this upper electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the upper electric auditors lottery is not won at step S1304, at step S1306, the lower electric auditors open execution process is executed. In this lower electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state.

After executing the process of step S1305 or step S1306, and when it is determined that the electric accessary product open lottery is not won in step S1302, the process after step S1307 is executed.
In step S1307, the MPU 62 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 62, for example, after setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, determines that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning the right operation opening 37B. If so, drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 is executed to set both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. Further, for example, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the right operating port, the variable prize winning device, and the pattern display device when winning the upper electric accessory lottery because the winning result becomes the "special losing result" after shifting to the high probability mode. be.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 43, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by a two-dot chain line.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 43 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 43(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37B rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation opening 37B has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. When the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is won as a result corresponding to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the upper electric accessory 37a1 provided in the right operation opening 37B is a predetermined It becomes an open state in the form of
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1. (See FIG. 43(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. become. In addition, in FIG. 43(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37B. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 43(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery, sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state when winning the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303, and then operates right. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the mouth 37B.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 43(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, when the result of the lottery is "special loss", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" Notify that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37B, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of stopping, a combination of special symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the sum of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec, which is the time, has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the big winning opening 38a is approximately It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a after 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 43(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. Thus, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right actuation opening 37B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the remaining plurality of game balls traveling along the board surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 to enter the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning, thereby making it easier for the player to win. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 holds 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. is designed to allow

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 43(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the open/close door 38b, and this plate Since it falls along the surface toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), it cannot win the big prize port 38a.

FIG. 44 shows the right operation port, the variable prize winning device, and the pattern display device when the win/loss result becomes "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. It is a diagram.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "big win winning" in the winning lottery, and when it is distributed to the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 44, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by a solid line, and the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by a two-dot chain line.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 44 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 44(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37B rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation opening 37B has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. As a result corresponding to the transition to the role open state, if the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is not won, as described above, the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right operation port 37B is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. The ball will be entered (see FIG. 44(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 44(A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) running along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37B. In this closing execution process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 44(B). . In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery and sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state when it does not win the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303, and then , the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 44(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
44(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" Notify that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37B, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of stopping, a combination of special symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the MPU 62 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the special display duration and the waiting time for the start of the small hit When about 0.2 sec, which is the total time, has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the lower electric accessory 37a2 and the big prize opening 38a is such that the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set in a closed state, and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 freely falls. In this case, it is set to reach the big winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a. (See FIG. 44(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time. The electric accessory 37a2 is difficult to hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to a closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. In other words, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is less likely to over-win than the upper electric accessory 37a1.
In addition, in this embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 holds one or two game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. designed to be able to

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 44(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, and after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this Since it will fall along the board surface toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Then, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state, and then sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. By doing so, the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 are released, and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then the right operation port By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the 37B, the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 enters the big winning opening 38a, and is released from the lower electric accessory 37a2. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as to enter the game ball B2 that has been hit into the big winning hole 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state. In addition, the variable winning driving section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing when the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric role item 37a1 or the lower electric role item 37a2 to enter the big winning hole 38a, and this game ball B2 A predetermined game ball can be paid out when the ball is entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 has a plate surface on the vertically upper side formed in a flat shape, and is a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof, and can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and has more than the lower electric accessory 37a2. It functions as a second guide piece capable of holding a game ball.
In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 by forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof in a wavy shape. By forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side into a flat shape and applying surface processing to make the game ball less slippery, it may be possible to hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2. In short, the second guide piece only needs to be able to hold more game balls than the first guide piece.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then enter the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the ball, a first open/close state in which the remaining game ball B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and an upper electric accessory After setting the 37a1 to the open state, by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the remaining held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and a second open/close state for releasing the game ball B2.

According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can open and close the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 that can be held and can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to any one of the second open/closed states, the second open/closed state is set. By setting, compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state or the closed state, and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Alternatively, although it is set to the closed state, opening and closing of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set by one drive unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1301 functions as guide piece lottery means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Then, in the step S306B for electric role support processing, the upper electric accessory is set to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball.

According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the processing for electric support support in step S306B for adjusting the amount of game balls to be held, the amount of game balls to be held is adjusted in the processing for electric support support in step S306B. By adjusting so as to increase, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
Further, according to this, the process for supporting the electric role in step S306B adjusts the amount of game balls held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets the upper electric accessory to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. The amount of holding the game ball is adjusted by the 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means alternately sets the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state without, for example, based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. You may adjust the amount which holds a game ball with the lower electric accessory 37a2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means is set to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state, thereby allowing the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to play the game. I was adjusting the amount of holding the ball. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece, for example, by configuring the guide piece so that the amount of holding the game ball can be varied. good. In short, the holding amount adjusting means only needs to be able to adjust the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2, so that the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 By setting both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 freely falls to open and close the door. Head to 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric role item 37a1 or the lower electric role item 37a2 to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the upper electric accessory 37a1 performs a plurality of games that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to hold the ball. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. is.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. The upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that pachinko. The machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operation port 37B. Although the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the upper electric accessory 37a1 or The lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, then 0 It is sufficient that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is performed when 1 sec has elapsed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operation port 37B. Although the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time were satisfied Based on, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In this case, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state in the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2. The opening/closing door 38b may be set to the open state in accordance with the timing according to the conditions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric role item 37a1 and the lower electric role item 37a2. As long as it is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the object 37a2, it does not have to be located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the mouth 38a, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is released from the upper electric accessory 37a1. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number of balls (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 does not have to be wavy.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. It also functions as a ball entry assisting means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 38. - 特許庁In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as an auxiliary body positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and drive the upper electric accessory. The portion 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving portion 37b2 drive the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to bring the holding state (open state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2). Alternatively, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that sets the non-holding state (the closed state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2).
Then, by setting the upper electric role product 37a1 or the lower electric role product 37a2 to the holding state, the electric role product driving unit 37b holds a plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and holds the upper electric role product. By setting both the object 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the non-holding state, it is held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. The game ball B2 is released.

In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 are used as the ball entry assist means. Other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(9) The pachinko machine 10 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area in a first open/closed state in which the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 capable of holding more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to any one of the second open/closed states, the second open/closed state is set. As a result, more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening 38a as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(10) The upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1. By setting the accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the amount of game balls held. Since the processing for electric support support of step S306B is provided, by adjusting the amount of game balls to be held in the processing for electric support support of step S306B, the game ball enters the big winning opening 38a. can be made easier. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The electric role support process of step S306B adjusts the amount of game balls held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301. The person pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. was
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the right actuation port 37C has an electric accessory 37a3 as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece. It is different from the first embodiment in this point.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 31 is arranged vertically above the electric accessory 37a3 with a distance of about one game ball, and the board surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wave shape. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a plate 50 configured by a flat plate-like movable piece.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37C avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a3 is provided with an inclination so as to descend toward the right operation port 37C, and is connected to the electric accessory driving portion 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. This electric accessory 37a3 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the electric accessory 37a3 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37C, thereby closing the right operation opening 37C. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a3 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37C and opening the right operation opening 37C. be.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a3 and falls.
Further, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C along the plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3. will do. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37C, and when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the right operation opening 37C can win a prize.

The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and is connected to a plate driving section 50 a mounted on the back side of the game board 31 . The plate 50 is driven by the plate driving section 50a to repeat the forward and backward states to make a single vibration. The forward state is a state in which the plate 50 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby holding game balls flowing down the game area. Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the plate 50 is formed in a wavy shape, the plate 50 can hold the game ball without dropping it. The retracted state is a state in which the plate 50 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In this embodiment, the cycle of the simple oscillation of the plate 50 is set to 2 seconds. Also, in this embodiment, the plate 50 is designed to hold 3 to 4 game balls while in the forward state.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 46, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG. An output port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plate driving section 50a for opening and closing the plate 50. As shown in FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning/failing result becomes "special losing result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the game ball wins the big winning opening. is.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 47, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to notify the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 47 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 47(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37C rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 47A illustrates a state in which three game balls are held by the plate 50. FIG.
As described above, the plate 50 is in a simple harmonic motion, so it goes into the backward state after being in the forward state. Since the plate 50 does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area by being in the backward state, the game balls held by the plate 50 are dropped as shown in FIG. 47(B). I will continue.

A game ball shot toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and enters the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric operation open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operation opening 37C is a predetermined It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operation opening 37C along this plate surface. becomes (see FIG. 47(B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 47(B), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. These three game balls are game balls dropped from the plate 50 .

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62, as shown in FIG. 47(C), executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variable period (see FIG. 47(C)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
47(D), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37C, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small winning. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric role 37a3 and the big prize opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric role 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric role 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the board surface of the electric role product 37a3 pass through the electric role product 37a3, drop down, and enter the big winning hole 38a (Fig. 47(D)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a3 and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

FIG. 48 shows the right operating opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the winning/failing result becomes "special losing result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the game ball does not win the big winning opening. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "big win winning" in the winning lottery, and when it is distributed to the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 48, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 48 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 48(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37C rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation port 37C has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 48(A) illustrates a state in which one game ball is held by the plate 50. FIG.
As described above, the plate 50 is in a simple harmonic motion, so it goes into the backward state after being in the forward state. Since the plate 50 does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area by being in the backward state, the game balls held by the plate 50 are dropped as shown in FIG. 48(B). I will continue.

A game ball shot toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and enters the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric operation open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operation opening 37C is a predetermined It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operation opening 37C along this plate surface. becomes (see FIG. 48(B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 48(B), there is one game ball (B1) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. This one game ball B1 is a game ball dropped from the plate 50. - 特許庁

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 48(C). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 48(C)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, when the lottery results in a "special loss result", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37C, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small winning. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric role 37a3 and the big prize opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric role 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric role 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the rest of the game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric role product 37a3 pass through the electric role product 37a3, drop, and enter the big winning hole 38a. According to this, the electric accessory 37a3 and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a. However, in the example of FIG. 47, since there is no game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3 and fallen, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole 38a (see FIG. 48(D)).

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, the electric accessory drive section 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 are released. In addition, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a3 enters the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after setting the electric role product 37a3 to the open state, the electric role product drive unit 37b closes the electric role product 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. However, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric role object 37a3, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric role object 37a3. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3.

Further, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a3 functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a3. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a3) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a3).
By setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the holding state, the electric accessory driving section 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a function as holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Specifically, the plate 50 functions as a holding main body positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, and the plate driving section 50a drives the plate 50 to It functions as a holding drive unit that sets the holding state or the non-holding state. Then, the plate drive unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and sets the plate 50 to the non-holding state to play a game that flows down the game area. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released without interfering with the ball.
According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a can make the electric accessory 37a3 reliably hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plate driving unit 50a is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the plate 50 so as to generate simple oscillation. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a.

In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is positioned upstream of the flow path of the game balls held by the electric accessory 37a3, but the plate 50 is located upstream of the flow path of the game balls held by the electric accessory 37a3. It does not have to be located upstream. In short, the variable prize winning device may be provided with an opening/closing door located downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the plate 50 has a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 (the number of game balls excluding the game balls that entered the right operation opening 37C) is greater than a predetermined number of game balls. A game ball can be held. The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal surface, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball can be placed on this plate surface. This is because it will be held without falling.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. Since the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 is a large winning opening. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into 38a, and to make it easier to win an over prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as (1) and (2) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The plate driving unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and sets the plate 50 to the non-holding state to make the game area flow down. The game balls held by the plate 50 are released without interfering with the game balls. According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a can make the electric accessory 37a3 reliably hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area.

(13) By driving the plate 50, the plate driving section 50a is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state so as to generate a single vibration, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a. The configuration can be simplified.
(14) After setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a, and the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is greater than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 can hold the game balls at the big winning opening 38a. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, and to make it easier to win an over prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 traveling along the board surface of the electric role product 37a pass through the electric role product 37a, fall, and enter the big winning hole 38a. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
As in the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving portion 37b. A guardrail 371 is provided, and a general prize winning opening 35D is provided vertically below the electric accessory 37a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a are provided at positions offset vertically upward compared to the first embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, the cover 381 is formed in a shape that matches the offset of the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a.

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end in contact with the upper right end of the right operation opening 37 and inclined downward toward the right operation opening 37 . A guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. A guard rail 371 is fixed so as to protrude from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 . Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation opening The ball flows down toward the out hole 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. In addition, a game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the drawing, can reach the board surface of the electric accessory 37a vertically upward or the opening/closing door 38b vertically upward. It will flow down along the plate surface of the
Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The general winning opening 35D is provided on the game board 31 so as to be positioned vertically below the guardrail 371. As shown in FIG. In other words, the general winning hole 35D reaches directly below the guardrail 371 (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) among the game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. A game ball is provided at a position where the ball is entered by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Of the game balls that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball that reaches the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. As a result, it falls toward the opening/closing door 38b of the big winning opening 38a avoiding the general winning opening 35D.

Further, in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35, and the ball enters the variable winning device 38. In some cases, 15 prize balls were paid out.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize winning openings 35 and 35D, and the ball enters the variable prize winning device 38. It is different from the first embodiment in that ten prize balls are paid out when a is generated.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is the "special loss result" after shifting to the high-probability mode.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 50, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 50 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 50(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 50(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 50(A), there are three game balls (B1, B21, B22) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 50(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 50(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
50(C), the MPU 102 receives the stop result command from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period elapses. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to enter the big winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 50(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B21 that reaches the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is By setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning hole 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when the balls enter the general prize winning openings 35 and 35D.
On the other hand, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B22 that reaches the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a By setting 37a to the closed state, the player avoids the general winning opening 35D and enters the big winning opening 38a. Then, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 50(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning driving section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a enter the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a. Predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game balls B21 and B22 released from are free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that pachinko can be used. The machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1, B21, and B22 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and changes the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. By setting, the game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous side holding position (the Left half of the plate surface) and the disadvantageous holding position (electric accessory 37a right half of the plate surface). Specifically, the advantageous holding position is advantageous to the player by entering a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls into the general winning opening 35D. Guided to the path, the disadvantageous side holding position is, when the game ball is entered, the number of game balls less than the predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) game balls are put out into the big winning opening 38a, It is designed to lead the player to a path that is disadvantageous.

According to this, the electric role product 37a, when releasing the remaining game ball in the electric role product driving unit 37b, the advantageous side holding position leading to the route that is advantageous for the player, and the electric role product driving unit 37b When releasing the remaining game balls in , it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b. can be improved.

In addition, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to an advantageous path by making the ball enter the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the game ball. When the ball is entered, the player is guided to a path disadvantageous to the player by making the ball enter the big winning hole 38a that pays out less game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the player can drive the electric accessory. When the remaining game ball is released at section 37b, the position of that game ball will be further noted.
In other words, when the electric accessory drive unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D different from the big winning opening 38a. , the pachinko machine 10, of the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a, enters the game ball in the advantageous side holding position into the general winning hole 35D different from the big winning hole 38a. When the game balls are entered, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous side holding position leads the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the ball to enter the general prize winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side. The holding position guides the player to a disadvantageous path by causing the ball to enter the big winning opening 38a that pays out fewer game balls than a predetermined number when the game ball enters. In other words, the advantageous side holding position and the disadvantageous side holding position create paths that are advantageous and disadvantageous to the player by making the number of game balls to be put out different.

On the other hand, for example, the advantageous side holding position may be guided to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the ball to enter the V winning hole that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball enters. . In short, the advantageous side holding position should be a position that can guide the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the guide piece. Any position is acceptable as long as it can lead to a path that is disadvantageous to the player when the remaining game balls are released by the drive unit.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(15) The electric accessory 37a, when releasing the remaining game balls by the electric accessory driving section 37b, is held in an advantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is advantageous for the player, and When releasing the remaining game balls, it has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path disadvantageous to the player rather than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b. can be improved.
(16) The advantageous side holding position guides the player to an advantageous path by making the ball enter the general prize winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side holding position is When the game balls enter, the game balls are put out in a number less than a predetermined number of game balls, and by making the balls enter the big winning opening 38a, the players are led to a disadvantageous path, so that the players can use the electric accessories. When the remaining game balls are released by the driving portion 37b, the positions of the game balls are further focused.

(17) When the electric accessory drive unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the electric accessory 37a sets the advantageous side holding position that leads to the path for entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D, which is different from the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 enters the game balls in the advantageous side holding position among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a into the general winning hole 35D different from the big winning hole 38a. When the game balls are entered, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the game ball launch cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the shooting cycle of the game ball, and not more than n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the shooting cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 finally stops displaying on the pay line L when the game result is either the "special loss result" or the "explicit small round high probability result". As a result, information relating to a special symbol combination was determined, and this special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. In the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to during the lottery, there were 551 random numbers for the "special loss result". In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of a "special outlier result" may be set to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the pending information related to the central working opening 36 in the first result display holding area Ra, and stores the pending information related to the right working opening 37 in the second result display section By storing the information in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the central operating port 36 and the reserved information regarding the right operating port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the holding information concerning the central working opening 36 and the holding information concerning the right working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the right operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the central operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the central operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the right operation port 37 for completion of game rounds in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning in the central actuation opening 36 or the right actuation opening 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. accessories 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning hole.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable prize winning driving part sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the big prize winning opening. do.
In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece and a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the game machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the board surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving portion; A game machine characterized by having

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released. In addition, when the guide piece driving portion releases the remaining game balls, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls at the advantageous side holding position leading to the path that is advantageous for the player and the guide piece driving portion. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving part, so that the game machine increases the player's attention to the game. be able to.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (central operation opening 36 and right operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 38),
A ball entry assisting means that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and assists the game balls entering the variable winning device,
The ball entry assisting means is
Auxiliary main bodies (electric accessories 37a, 37a3 and upper electric accessories 37a1) located upstream of the flow path of game balls entering the variable winning device;
An auxiliary drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b and upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the auxiliary main unit,
The auxiliary drive unit
By setting the auxiliary main body in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the auxiliary main body in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. Release the game ball held by the auxiliary main body in this way,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
The flow of game balls passing through the auxiliary main body has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. an opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the path;
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The auxiliary body part is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. game machine.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the auxiliary main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine can be greatly improved. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the winning hole, and over winning can be facilitated.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The variable winning driving unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main unit enters the big winning opening.

According to feature B2 of the group of the present invention, the variable winning driving unit sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main unit enters the big winning hole, so that the game machine can More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the winning hole, and over winning can be facilitated.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the auxiliary main body.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the auxiliary main body, and is released from the auxiliary main body by setting the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving section. The game ball thus dropped will freely fall toward the opening/closing door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the game ball held by the auxiliary main body to enter the big winning hole.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the auxiliary main body portion to enter the big winning hole;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the auxiliary body portion to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature B4 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the auxiliary main body enters the big winning opening, and a big winning. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth, the player is expected to catch the game ball released from the auxiliary main body. Attention will be paid to whether or not the ball enters the big winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B4 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary main body is
a first auxiliary main body (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second auxiliary body portion (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first auxiliary body portion,
The auxiliary drive section (the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2)
After setting the first auxiliary body portion to the open state, the game ball held by the first auxiliary body portion is released by setting the first auxiliary body portion to the closed state. 1 auxiliary open/close state;
After setting the second auxiliary main body portion to the open state, by setting the second auxiliary main body portion to the closed state, the game ball held by the second auxiliary main body portion is released. 2 auxiliary open/close states,
The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is set to either the first auxiliary opening/closing state or the second auxiliary opening/closing state.

According to feature B5 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine has a first auxiliary opening/closing state in which a first auxiliary main body capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and the game area flows down. A second auxiliary main body part capable of holding a plurality of game balls and capable of holding a larger number of game balls than the first auxiliary main body part is set to any one of the second auxiliary open/closed states for opening and closing. By setting the second auxiliary opening/closing state, more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting the first auxiliary opening/closing state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second auxiliary main body is opened or closed, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that it comprises closing effect execution means (closing time effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body portion is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving portion. .

According to feature B6 of the group of the present invention, the game machine is provided with closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving unit. After the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined effect. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary main body is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit;
Having a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit. A game machine characterized by

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the auxiliary drive unit sets the auxiliary main unit to the holding state and then sets the auxiliary main unit to the non-holding state, whereby the game ball held by the auxiliary main unit is release the In addition, the auxiliary main body has an advantageous side holding position that leads to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary driving section, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the auxiliary driving section. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the auxiliary drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. .

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. Accessory 37a);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The game machine is
After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, period adjustment means for adjusting the relay period until the opening and closing door is set to the open state by the variable prize winning drive unit (small win in step S907A A gaming machine characterized by comprising a process of setting waiting time for start.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. The game machine is provided with a period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period from when the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the variable prize winning driving section sets the open/close door to the open state. , the relay period can be adjusted by the period adjusting means so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning hole. According to this, the player pays attention to the relay period from when the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the opening/closing door is set to the open state by the variable prize winning driving section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The period adjusting means adjusts the relay period by setting the opening/closing door to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing. .

According to the feature C2 of the group of inventions, the period adjustment means includes a first opening timing for setting the open/close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning opening, and a big winning. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth, the player can easily see that the game ball released from the guide piece is large. Attention will be paid to whether or not the ball enters the winning hole. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature C3 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the holding main body is positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5 of the invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with closing performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece driving portion, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (upper side) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. the electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece (processing for electric support support in step S306B).

According to feature D1 of the group of the present invention, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. Since the game machine is provided with holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of game balls to be held, by adjusting the holding amount adjusting means to increase the amount of game balls to be held, a large winning opening can be achieved. It is possible to make it easier to enter a game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
Guide piece lottery means (process of step S1301) for executing lottery as to whether or not to set the guide piece to the open state;
The holding amount adjusting means is
A game machine, wherein the amount of a game ball held by said guide piece is adjusted based on the lottery result of said guide piece lottery means.

According to feature D2 of the group of the present invention, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. will pay attention to the results of the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to an open state, by setting the first guide piece to a closed state, a game ball held by the first guide piece is released. state and
Second opening/closing for releasing the game ball held by the second guide piece by setting the second guide piece to the closed state after setting the second guide piece to the open state. state and
The game machine, wherein the holding amount adjusting means sets the state to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature D3 of the group of the present invention, the holding amount adjusting means is in the first open/closed state in which the first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and the game area is allowed to flow down. A second guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls and capable of holding a larger number of game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second open/closed states for opening and closing the second guide piece. By setting to the open/closed state of , more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning hole.

According to feature D4 of the group of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning opening, so that the game machine can win a big winning. To surely enter a game ball into the mouth.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature D7 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7 of the invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. The game ball held by the holding body part can be released without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D10 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position.
Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece drive section, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (central operation opening 36 and right operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 38),
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body (plate 50);
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. release the game ball held by the holding main body in this way,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
The flow of game balls that have passed through the holding main body has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter. an opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the path;
A gaming machine comprising a variable prize winning drive section (variable prize winning drive section 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the open/close door.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the open/close door of the variable winning device is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can make it easier for a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area to enter the big winning hole.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The game machine is characterized in that the holding driving section is set to generate a simple vibration by driving the holding body section so as to repeat a holding state and a non-holding state.

According to the feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the holding drive section is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the holding main body section so as to make a simple vibration, so that the game machine is equipped with the holding means. configuration can be simplified.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the holding main body.

According to feature E3 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the holding main body, and is released from the holding main body by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state by the holding driving section. The game ball thus dropped will freely fall toward the opening/closing door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the game ball held by the holding body portion to enter the big winning hole.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The holding body portion is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding body portion is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. game machine.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the holding main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body is greater than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine can be greatly improved. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the winning hole, and to make it easier to make an over-winning. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed,
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric accessory) capable of holding a game ball flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state not allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the lottery means 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a closing effect execution means (closed effect determination process in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
When the game player is in an advantageous state by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the closing effect executing means is arranged to notify the player that the game player will be in an advantageous state. , and by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player can This game machine is characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification performance (low-expectation performance) for informing a player of a disadvantageous state.

According to the feature F2 of the group of the present invention, the closing effect execution means is advantageous to the player when the state is advantageous to the player by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving section. By executing an advantageous state informing performance for informing the player of the state, and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the game is disadvantageous to the player when the state becomes unfavorable to the player. Since the unfavorable state notification performance is executed to notify the player that the game will be in such a state, the player pays attention to the predetermined performance executed by the closing performance executing means.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for shifting the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lottery means. a device 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit
setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The closing effect execution means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, so that when there is a high expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening By executing an advantageous state notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning hole is low. This game machine is characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification performance.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable winning driving part sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the big winning opening. do.
In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, the closing performance executing means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive section, thereby providing an advantageous state when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening is high. By executing the notification performance and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the disadvantageous state notification performance is performed when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning hole is low. Since it is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect executing means.

Feature F4.
In the game machine described in feature F3 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature F4 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature F5.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature F5 of the group of inventions, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow a game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece and a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature F9 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece driving portion, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operating port, there are an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and entered into the operating port, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game region is not allowed to enter the operating port. and a guide piece driving part for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonously set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving section, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature G group> Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed,
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. accessories 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the board surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving portion; A game machine characterized by having

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released. In addition, when the guide piece driving portion releases the remaining game balls, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls at the advantageous side holding position leading to the path that is advantageous for the player and the guide piece driving portion. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving part, so that the game machine increases the player's attention to the game. be able to.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by allowing the ball to enter a prize winning opening that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the game ball. A game machine characterized by leading a player to a disadvantageous path by causing a ball to enter a prize winning opening for putting out less than a predetermined number of game balls when entering the ball.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the game ball to enter the payout opening for paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and is disadvantageous. The side holding position guides the player to a disadvantageous path by causing the game balls to enter the winning hole for paying out less game balls than a predetermined number when entering the game balls, so that the player can: When the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, the position of the game ball is further noted.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for shifting the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lottery means. a device 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece is
The disadvantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a path for entering the big winning hole when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive section, the advantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a winning opening (general winning opening 35D) different from the big winning opening (general winning opening 35D)
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece and held at the disadvantage side holding position is allowed to enter the big winning hole.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece and held at the disadvantageous side holding position enters the big winning opening. In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the game machine can make the game ball in the holding position on the disadvantageous side out of the remaining game balls held by the guide piece enter the big winning opening, and when the game ball enters the A predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a winning opening different from the big winning opening when the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece driving portion. , among the remaining game balls held by the guide piece, the game balls in the advantageous side holding position can be entered into a winning opening different from the big winning opening. More game balls can be paid out than the game balls of . Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece drive section.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece and a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, the game machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operating port, there are an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and entered into the operating port, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game region is not allowed to enter the operating port. and a guide piece driving part for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonously set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving section, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out mouth, 47... pattern display device, 60... main control device, 62... MPU, 90... sound emission control device,
92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

JP 2005-074175 A

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of a player to a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 comprises a shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a game ball entering the game area flowing down the game area. In addition, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the start ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means for shifting a game state to a specific control state, and a variable winning device for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when the state shifts to the specific control state, and a plurality of players flowing down the game area. A holding means capable of holding a game ball is provided, and the holding means comprises a holding main body portion and a holding driving portion for setting a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding main body portion, and the holding means The drive unit holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body part to a holding state, and sets the holding body part to a non-holding state to play a game that flows down the game area. The game ball held by the holding main body is released so as not to interfere with the ball, and the variable winning device includes a large winning opening for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters, and the game area. and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter, and a downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body. An opening/closing door positioned on the side and a variable prize driving unit for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door are provided.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, the game ball entering the game area flowing down the game area, and the shooting means for shooting a game ball A start ball entry means for executing an internal lottery at the time of entering a ball, and a game in a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the start ball entry means. Equipped with a game state transition means for transitioning states, and a variable prize winning device that shifts to a state in which game balls can enter when shifting to the specific control state, and can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The holding means includes a holding main body portion and a holding driving portion that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding main body portion, and the holding driving portion includes the By setting the holding body portion to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body portion to the non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from interfering with each other. Then, the game ball held by the holding main body is released, and the variable prize winning device includes a large prize winning port for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters, and a game ball flowing down the game area. into the big winning hole, and a closed state in which the game balls flowing down the game area are not entered, and is located downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body. It comprises a door, and a variable winning driving unit that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine has the effect of being able to increase the attention of the player to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; front view of game board A front view of the game board with the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device enlarged Figure showing the display screen of the pattern display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery A diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot A diagram showing a distribution table storing random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Figure showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing A diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing A diagram showing a flow chart of display duration setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process A diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process A diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state, etc. A diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable prize winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with a sound emission control apparatus. A diagram showing a flowchart of game ball counting processing A diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process at the time of closing After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the result of winning becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " A diagram showing the right operation port, variable winning device, and pattern display device when 50” is set After shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the win-or-loss result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small hit is " A diagram showing the right operation port, variable winning device, and pattern display device when 50” is set After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the result of winning becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " 200" is set, the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing A diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support After shifting to the high probability mode, the winning result becomes a "special loss result", and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when winning the upper electric accessory lottery After shifting to the high probability mode, the win/fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right actuation opening and a variable winning device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and the display control device After shifting to the high-probability mode, the win-or-fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the game ball wins the big winning opening. After shifting to the high-probability mode, the win-or-fail result becomes a "special loss result" and the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the game ball does not win the big winning opening. A front view of a game board in which the vicinity of a right actuation opening and a variable winning device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention is enlarged. A diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable prize winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is a "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode.

[First Embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. This pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions as the supporting side, and an inner frame (not shown) disposed in front of the inner frame. A front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side, and a front door frame 13 disposed behind the inner frame and rearward with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 has a locking device (not shown) provided at the leading end of the rotation. This locking device has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by unlocking the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21 . In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of transparent and colorless glass, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like to be transparent and colorless.
In addition, the front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of light emitting means configured by various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion A speaker unit 24 is provided on both the left and right sides of 23 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. there is

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are vertically arranged side by side and both are provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided in the central portion of the upper plate 25a. The upper tray 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a row toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5). It has the function of guiding. The push button 25b functions as an operating means for executing an expected effect that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 has a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower tray 26a. The shooting handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to shoot a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. do. The shooting handle 27 changes the shooting intensity of the game ball shot toward the game area, ie, the momentum of shooting, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
The game board 31, as shown in FIG. 2, has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 . Almost the entire area of this game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21 .
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 form a guide rail 34 for guiding game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 when the player rotates the shooting handle 27. The game ball that has been hit is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the center of the upper part of the game area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side of the side. In this embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has, in the game area, a plurality of large and small openings which are formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35 provided at each opening, a central operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 36, a right operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 37, a variable winning device 38, and an out port 39 . The game board 31 includes through gates 41 provided on the left and right sides of the central portion, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. have. Furthermore, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the central operating opening 36, the right operating opening 37, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 has a detection sensor 40a, the central working opening 36 has a detecting sensor 40b, the right working opening 37 has a detecting sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 has a detecting sensor 40d. It has The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winning of game balls, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35 . The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the central operating port 36 and when a ball enters the right operating port 37. - 特許庁The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加In addition, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

Out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of game board 31 . Game balls that do not enter various winning holes are discharged from the game area through the out hole 39.例文帳に追加In addition, the out port 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters the out hole 39, unlike when a ball enters the various winning holes.

Each through gate 41 is provided with a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 5) for detecting an entry of a game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out prize balls when a ball enters each through gate 41, unlike the case where a ball enters a prize winning opening.

Here, the entry ball means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of game balls into the out port 39, entry of game balls into various winning ports is also expressed as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being ejected from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. A ball entering the through gate 41 is also referred to as winning a prize, like entering a ball into various winning holes.

The central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31 . The central operation port 36 is provided so as to open upward so that game balls flowing down the game area can be entered. The right operation port 37 is provided so as to open rightward so that the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right operation port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. ing.
The player hits to the right by maximizing the rotation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a is inclined downward toward the right operating port 37, and is connected to an electric accessory driving portion 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the electric accessory 37a is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37 so that the right operation opening 37 is closed. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37 and opening the right operation opening 37. be.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.
In addition, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along the plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. will do.
At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37, and when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the right operation opening 37 can win a prize.

The game board 31 has a right outlet 391 provided on the right side of the electric accessory 37a. This right outlet 391 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by performing router processing. Also, the right outlet 391 has the same function as the outlet 39 provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31 . Specifically, the game ball entering the right out port 391 joins the game ball entering the out port 39, and is then detected by the detection sensor 40e provided on the back side of the game board 31. It's like

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an open/close door 38b for opening and closing the large winning opening 38a, and an open/close door 38b. A variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be led to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 has a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 38 . The cover 381 consists of a transparent (or translucent) panel 381a formed to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and an opaque panel 381a provided around the transparent panel 381a. panel 381b (see FIG. 2).
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21. FIG.

The big winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by applying router processing. As described above, the big winning opening 38a is equipped with a detection sensor 40d for detecting the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. 31, and an open state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is opened. Here, when the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state, the game ball flows down to the out port 39 side along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. I will go. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a flat shape, the game ball is less likely to flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. As a result, the water immediately flows down to the out port 39 side without taking much time.
The variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 38b.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. When the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing execution mode is entered, the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize.
The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, after the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31 to close the opening of the big winning opening 38a, and retreats toward the inside of the game board 31 to play the game. By being buried in the board 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the big prize opening 38a is opened.
On the other hand, the opening/closing door may employ a configuration other than this. For example, the opening/closing door may be formed in the shape of a rectangular plate, and may be provided on the game board 31 so as to be rotatable about one side on the lower side as a central axis. In this case, the opening/closing door rotates toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby opening the opening of the big winning opening 38a and rotating toward the inside of the game board 31. By moving and being buried in the game board 31, it is only necessary to have a closed state in which the opening of the big winning opening 38a is closed.

The main display device 42, as shown in FIG. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 . Also, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22.例文帳に追加In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents game balls from falling in front of the main display device 42 .

The main display portion 45 includes a first result display portion 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the central operating port 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the right operating port 37. A second result display section 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern by using the winning to the central working port 36 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the central working port 36. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern with the winning of the right operation opening 37 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the right operation opening 37. to display the results of When the result of this internal lottery is the result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 function as starting ball entry means for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and executing an internal lottery when a game ball enters. do.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right operation port 37 functions as a lottery means for executing an internal lottery upon entry of a game ball while allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. This right operating port 37 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, is in an open state for entering the right operating port 37, and is closed so as not to enter the right operating port 37 with game balls flowing down the game region. It has an electric accessory 37a (guide piece) having a state and an electric accessory drive section 37b (guide piece drive section) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the electric accessory 37a.

The character object display unit 46 performs variable display of the pattern with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of The accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In this electric operation open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and character object display unit 46 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may be liquid crystal display devices, organic EL display devices, CRTs, It may also consist of other types of display devices such as dot matrix. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a pattern display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 has a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 47 . The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured.

The pattern display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display.
This symbol display device 47 starts the variable display of symbols based on the winning to the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 . That is, when the symbol display device 47 performs the variable display in the first result display section 45a of the main display section 45 and when the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45 performs the variable display, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The pattern display device 47 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or other display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 includes a first holding lamp portion 49a provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 47, a second holding lamp portion 49b provided in the lower right region of the pattern display device 47, and a pattern display. a third holding lamp portion 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47;

The first reservation lamp portion 49a is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36, and is lit according to the number of reserved games. The first holding lamp portion 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 45a and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The second reservation lamp part 49b is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won the right operation opening 37, and is lit according to the number of reserved balls. The second holding lamp portion 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display portion 45b and the symbol display device 47. FIG.
The third reservation lamp portion 49c is a portion that displays the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and lights up according to the number of reserved games. The third holding lamp portion 49 c can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display portion 46 .
Note that each of the holding lamp portions 49a to 49c may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a portion of the pattern display device 47, which will be described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas. Column Z3 is displayed. In each pattern row Z1 to Z3, 8 kinds of patterns consisting of numbers "1" to "8" are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "8" is followed by "1". configured as follows. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by the dashed-dotted line.

The symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game round is executed on the display screen G. - 特許庁The effect for this game round is switched from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and finally, predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on the activated line L. end with a state
In other words, the game cycle means the period from the start of variable display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to the display of a predetermined stop result based on the wins to the operation ports 36 and 37 .

It should be noted that the pattern display device 47 is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily selected. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than the main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 63a, a sorting table storage area 63b, a reach table storage area 63c, and a display duration table storage area 63d. These areas are described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 64 has various areas such as a various counter area 64a, a reserved ball storage area 64b, and an electrical work reservation area 64c. These areas are described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. Further, the output ports of the MPU 62 are an electric accessory drive unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 45 and the character object display unit 46 .

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to open and close the electric accessory 37a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c to open and close the big winning opening 38a. Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 45 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the operation ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the blackout monitoring board 65 .
The detection sensors 40a to 40f correspond to the general winning opening 35, the central working opening 36, the right working opening 37, various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and each through gate 41 on a one-to-one basis. is provided. The MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39, and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f. In addition, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 .

The payout control device 70 executes payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (game balls to be lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 60. do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation supply power. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power-off power supply unit supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

In addition, the power supply/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 25a onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to the solenoid to launch the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is met.

<Electrical Configuration for Execution of Internal Lottery by MPU 62 of Main Control Unit 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory open counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37 is to be in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 (see FIG. 5).

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 64c (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the central operation port 36. store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, when the winning to the central operation port 36 occurs a plurality of times in a row, the MPU 62, first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 in order of hold information. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display portion reservation area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the central operation opening 36 are reserved. The first result display reserved area Ra includes storage areas for writing the reserved numbers stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the central working port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, and may be singular. may

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the right operation port 37 in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order. store it. Specifically, when the winning to the right operation opening 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 outputs the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. Store in chronological order.

As described above, since the second result display portion reservation area Rb has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls into the right operation opening 37 are reserved. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
In addition, the number of reserves related to the right operation port 37 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular. may

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 45a and 45b. This is the area to move the .

The electrician reservation area 64c includes four storage areas, like the first result display reservation area Ra and the second result display reservation area Rb. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 41 is reserved up to four.
The number of pending gates 41 is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more. may

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be.
Then, based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (electric role object release lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with mutually different frequencies of allowing game balls to enter the right actuation opening 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric role product 37a to the open state is low. and a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state more times when the electric role open state is won, and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state. The opening time of one time to do is also getting longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state between each opening in the one-time electrical open state is shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 46) is shortened.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the right operation opening 37 than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player left-handedly hits the firing handle 27 with a medium amount of rotational operation, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed as the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the lateral side to the central portion, the probability of winning the central working opening 36 rather than the right working opening 37 can be increased. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right with the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27 set to the maximum, and the position where the game ball reaches in the upper part of the game area is the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from one side to the opposite side, the odds of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can easily cause game balls to enter the central operating port 36 and can hardly cause game balls to enter the right operating port 37. 1 route), and a right-handed route (second route) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the right operating port 37 and makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the central operating port 36. there is

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode changes the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low frequency support mode. may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is transmitted through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a success/failure table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the values of the random numbers that win the jackpot are stored in the hit/fail table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as hit/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (whether or not information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two win/fail lottery modes of a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes the success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group).
The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result".
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. , the number of random number values for the "special outlier result" is two, and the random number value for the "normal outlier result" is another value. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability of the success/failure results being "big win winning" and "special losing result" is 1/300, respectively. The probability that the hit/fail result is the “normal result” is 298/300.

On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success/failure table is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. , there are 28 random number values that result in a "normal outlier result", and the random number values that result in a "special outlier result" are other values. Therefore, under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the probability that the win/loss result will be a "big win" is about 1/30, and the win/fail result will be a "special loss". The probability of a "outcome" is about 11/12, and the probability of a hit/fail result being an "abnormal result" is about 1/20.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating port 36, and the game ball wins the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an allocation table storing random number values relating to allocation destinations of types of jackpots.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 5) in the allocation table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the central operation port 36 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8A, includes "low probability result (special distribution result for low probability)", "explicit small round high probability result (high probability result for small round)". , and a plurality of distribution results of "best result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 19” are distributed to “explicit small rounds "High Probability Result" and "20 to 29" are assigned to "Most Favorable Result".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the right operation port 37 It is a table referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot.
The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low probability results”, and “10 to 29” are the “best results” ”.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described.
The "low-probability result" is a sorting result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.
The "explicit small round high probability result" and the "most advantageous result" are sorting results in which the win/fail lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

The difference in the opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball has entered the central operating port 36, and the game ball has entered the right operating port 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The ready-to-win display is an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win" but results in a "normal failure".
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the result of the win/fail lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "normal loss". By comparing with , a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate a ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is a table that stores values of random numbers related to occurrence of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 (see FIG. 5).

Here, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having a number of is stopped on the activated line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the winning lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the valid line L. In addition, if it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or if it is not a "big winning lottery" in the winning lottery, it will be a "special missing result". In this case, the symbol display device 47 has, as a stop result, not a combination of symbols having the same number, but different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normal result" in the winning lottery. A combination of special symbols is stop-displayed on the effective line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to the "express small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, In the case where the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit" but results in a "special loss result"), this does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the ready-to-win display mode, some of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are displayed on the activated line L. By stopping and displaying, the same combination of symbols is displayed to indicate the result of stopping, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, by generating the ready-to-win display, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the pattern display device 47 and before displaying the predetermined stop result, Players can be expected to be sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 47. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expectation effects, namely, the aforementioned ready-to-win display and advance notice display.

The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". This advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate instead of making the effect more likely to occur, or may be combined.
While the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The mode of the advance notice display is that of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and some of the symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z1) is stopped on the activated line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed or ready-to-win display is generated, a predetermined character etc. are displayed on the display screen G as moving images. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is
Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration time on the main display section 45 and the pattern display duration time on the pattern display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes reading processing of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, judges the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to various winning ports have detected the winning of game balls, it sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize balls, and sets this set prize ball command. A command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the specific unit number to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control to cause the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. do. Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it if it reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. In this through winning process, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service reservation area 64c. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the third suspension lamp portion 49 c and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 .
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp part 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, the number of reserved game balls that have won the through gate 41 is, as described above, a maximum of four, and the third reservation lamp portion 49c is lit by the number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for the working opening.
The prize winning process for the operating port will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the central operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether the game ball has entered the central operating port 36 (start winning). determine whether
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the central operation port 36, in step S202, it grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra, and reserves the number of balls stored in the reservation area Ra. The number is set in a predetermined storage area in the first result display section reservation area Ra as the first start-up reservation storage number RaN. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the central operating port 36, in step S203, the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the right operating port 37 detects the winning of the game ball. is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the right operation opening 37 (start winning).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not entered the right operating opening 37, it ends the winning processing for the operating opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the right operation opening 37 in step S203, in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped, The pending number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion pending area Rb as the second start pending storage number RbN.

In step S205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes from step S207.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S206, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory The accessory 37a is set to the closed state. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S206, or when it is determined in step S205 that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 suspends the start set in step S202 or step S204 in step S207. It is determined whether or not the memory number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start suspension memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 62 ends the prize winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S208, the value of the start pending memory number N is updated by adding 1 to it.

In step S209, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the result display holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, ie, the storage area corresponding to the number N of start suspension storage updated in step S208.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area of the empty storage areas in the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S208. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 stores the data in the storage area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process are stored as pending information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display portion pending area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S208. do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 stores the second start pending memory number RbN in the storage area corresponding to "4" updated in step S208. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

Further, in step S209, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the prize winning process for the operating port.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 49a or the second reservation lamp section 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62 . In addition, the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36 or the right operation opening 37 is, as described above, a maximum of 4, and the first reservation lamp part 49a or the second reservation lamp part 49b has this reservation number The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it determines that the prize ball command is set, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70 Send. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open/close execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the command for that effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . In addition, when the MPU 62 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is returned to 0 and cleared.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a sorting lottery, determines information related to a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 47, and determines a pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. decision of information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round has ended. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 .
Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, when the MPU 62 starts a new game cycle while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 62 executes electric support processing for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37 a provided in the right actuation opening 37 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Then, after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning in the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory drive unit 37b is driven. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. In this game ball shooting control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply/shooting control device 80 to execute shooting control for shooting a game ball based on the rotation of the shooting handle 27 by the player. Specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). . In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Further, the power supply/shooting control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball when a predetermined shooting condition is met.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308, the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing of step S312 and subsequent steps without executing the processing of step S309 and subsequent steps. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag has not been set, in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet arrived, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311. , the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeats steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the next normal process is executed by executing step S301 again. Begin normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. ) has passed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not passed in step S402, it repeats the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has passed in step S402, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, it executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. do.

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (power failure processing) of the normal processing, and if they match, , the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines that the RAM determination value is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411, and timer interrupt in step S412. Allow the process to occur, and shift to the above-described normal process.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game round control processing.
In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in progress, it ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game cycle regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, the main display section 45 determines whether the variable display is being performed, that is, the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is not performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display section 45 is performing the variable display, the MPU 62 executes the game cycle progressing process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting a game cycle in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these numbers of reservations is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", it ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area A data setting process is executed to set the pending information stored in Rb for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reservation memory number RbN in the second result display section reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is "0" or less. do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0", it executes data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for completing the game cycle, and the data setting processing for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for completion of the game cycle.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37, the operation to the central operation opening 36 is performed. The reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether or not there is reservation information stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra based on the winning of the game ball. Set for one digestion.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN in the first result display portion pending area Ra to update the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which main display section 45, out of the first result display section 45a and the second result display section 45b, starts the variable display when completing a game round. is. In this step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display section flag, so when the game round is completed, the variable display is made on the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the central operation opening 36. indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the central operation opening 36. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp portion 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the first reservation lamp portion 49a as the number of reserved game balls that have won the central operation opening 36 decreases.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that when the game cycle is completed, the second result display section 45b displays a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the right operation opening 37. indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37. It contains information for 90 to recognize.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp portion 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the lighting number of the second reservation lamp portion 49b as the number of reserved game balls winning the right operation opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, in step S702, the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. In this success/failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success/failure table read out in step S702 or step S703 to obtain the result of the success/failure lottery (result of success/failure). judge. In addition, as described above, the winning result is one of "big win winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result". The same is true for

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning", it executes the processing from step S706 onwards. , the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, in step S705, the process (process after step S706) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the winning result is "big hit winning" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the first result display section 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the central operation opening 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63. FIG.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the second result display section 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37 , the second sorting table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45. A decision is made according to the sorting result, and the decided information is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is an "explicit small round high probability result" , the explicit few-round high-probability result flag is set, and if the "most favorable result" is specified, the most favorable result flag is set. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (process after step S712) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is the "special losing result".
If the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the "special failure result", it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines that the success/failure result is not the "special failure result" in step S712. , the process after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stop result table for the big win result.
At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning result is the "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stop result setting process for the out-of-normal result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 45a or the second result display section 45b of the main display section 45, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal outlier result stored in the ROM 63 in advance, thereby determining information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 . The mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the normal losing result is different from the mode of the picture set in the stopping result table for the jackpot result and the stopping result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a display duration setting process.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a special out flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is not set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing after step S802.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is set in the RAM 64, it executes the processing after step S806.

First, the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 62 has not set the special out flag in the RAM 64 will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64. FIG.

In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display will occur on the symbol display device 47. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "best result", and the success/failure result determined in step S704 is a "normal deviation result". At the same time, when winning the ready-to-win generation lottery, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, as described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Run a reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the ready-to-win display occurs, in step S804, it reads the display duration table for ready-to-win occurrence generation stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the reach display does not occur, in step S805, the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. read out.

Next, processing (processing after step S806) when the MPU 62 determines that the special out flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S801 will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.

When the MPU 62 determines that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode in step S806 (when the lottery mode is determined to be the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S802 described above.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S807. read out.

After executing any of steps S804, S805, and S807, the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time in step S808. Specifically, when the MPU 62 reads the reach occurrence display duration table or the reach non-occurrence display duration table, by referring to each display duration table, the MPU 62 acquires from the fluctuation type counter buffer A display continuation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is determined, and the determined display continuation time is set in a display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64. Further, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 .
The special display duration time is shorter than the display duration time determined with reference to the reach generation display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

Here, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. Therefore, the display continuation time for consuming the pending information related to the central working port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the central working port 36 increases. The display duration time for consuming the pending information related to the right operating port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of pending items related to the right operating port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the pending number is the same, the display duration time in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

In addition, the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set to a relationship opposite to the above-described relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and support mode It may be configured so that it does not fluctuate. Alternatively, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start processing, the processing after step S717 will be described with reference to FIG.
At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the command for variation and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . This processing will be described later in detail.

The variation command includes information related to display duration. Also, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In addition, since the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table, based on the information related to the display duration Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the display duration is the special display duration in the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes the special display duration information. Note that the variation command may directly include information on the duration of the special display.

The type command includes information related to the win/fail result. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to "big win win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. Also, the type command includes information related to sorting results. In other words, the type command includes each information related to "low probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "best result" as information related to the sorting result.
In the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command contains information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first Since it indicates that the result display section 45a is to start the variable display, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second Since it indicates that the result display section 45b is to start the variable display, the second result display section 45b is caused to start the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game round control process, the game round progressing process of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the MPU 62 executes fluctuation end processing. In this fluctuation end processing, the MPU 62 stores the information (main (information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45). Then, at the end of the game cycle, the MPU 62 controls the display of the main display section 45 so that the main display section 45 displays the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 45 during the variable display.

Here, the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 45 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.
The display area of the main display section 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 instead of the main display unit 45 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S902 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S914.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 45 has not ended, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 45 has ended, it determines in step S903 whether the success/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. determine whether Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result"), the game Terminate state transition processing.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S905.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S911.

First, the processing (processing after step S905) when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S905, the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the big winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 stores a waiting time (waiting time) for starting a small hit. period) is set to "50". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for starting the small winning is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S908, the MPU 62 sets a small winning command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the small winning command set in step S908 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small winning command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), in step S909, the various counters in the RAM 64 A timer counter T provided in the area 64a is set to "1000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

At step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the processing (processing after step S911) when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is not the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a low-round high-probability result (“explicit low-round high-probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the result of allocation is a small round high probability result, in step S912 the MPU 62 sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to "2". In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a small number of rounds, that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "best result", step At S913, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning hole 38a has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning hole 38a. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing the process of step S912 or step S913, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S909 described above.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of the type of the game result, except for the special loss result in the high-probability mode. A waiting time for opening is set in the timer counter T.
In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result, except for the special loss result in the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

Next, processing (processing after step S914) when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is in progress will be described.
In step S914, the MPU 62 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1025 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing from step S1002.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing from step S1006.

First, in step S1001, the processing (processing after step S1002) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is not open will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, in step S1003, the timer counter T Determines whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", in step S1004, it executes a special winning opening opening process.
The special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", in step S1102, the MPU 62 sets "1" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64, and At S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", in step S1104, it sets "8" to the winning counter PC, and in step S1105, the distribution result is a low-round high-probability result (“explicit low-round high-probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the result of allocation is the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 38a in step S1107. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC at step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a.
Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state to when it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. aspect).

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning result is not the "special losing result", as described above, the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby allowing the game to enter the big winning opening 38a. The upper limit of the total winning number of balls is set to eight.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the firing period of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls is easy to win in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls. (shorter than the period), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result", as described above, the MPU 62 sets the winning counter PC to "1", so that the winning opening 38a is entered. The upper limit of the total winning number of game balls is set to one. The upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a and the shooting cycle of the game balls (more specifically, shorter than the shooting cycle of the game balls. short), it is difficult to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 38a.

Returning to the explanation of the big winning opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S1005 will be explained with reference to FIG.
MPU62 sets an opening command in step S1005, after performing the big winning a prize opening process of step S1004. This release command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information related to the number of executions of the round game. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1006) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the big winning opening 38a is being opened in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit continuation time set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1007.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1018.

First, processing (processing after step S1007) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special prize opening 38a. It should be noted that determination of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the large winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 38a, the MPU 62 ends the large winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been won in the big prize opening 38a, in step S1008, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the prize winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1010 the closing execution process is executed. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 38c.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. This close command contains information about the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time a round game is executed. In other words, the closing command includes information related to the number of round game executions. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", the MPU 62 sets the value of the open/close counter SOC to "0", and then executes the processes after step S1024, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1013 onward.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is the open standby time from when the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In addition, in this embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. This opening standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processing from step S1016.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for the ending, like the waiting time for the opening, is the same regardless of the type of game result except for the special loss result in the high-probability mode. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode, except for the special failure result in the high probability mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same.
In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1018) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing in the same manner as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets a closing command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special loss result".
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/loss result is not the "special loss result", that is, when it determines that the win/loss result is "big win", it executes the processing from step S1021 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", it executes the processing from step S1023 onwards.

First, the process (process after step S1021) when it is determined by the MPU 62 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" in step S1020 will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes after step S1016 described above.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1023) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the win/fail result is the "special losing result" will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. Here, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result", or after executing step S1023, the MPU 62 executes step S1024.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1015 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", in step S1025 it determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. .

When the MPU 62 determines that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode in step S1025 (when it determines that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1016 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. In other words, the waiting time for the ending is 0 sec in the special loss result of the high probability mode.

Returning to the description of the game state transition processing, the processing after step S915 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S914, the MPU 62 checks in step S915 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", in step S916 the value of the timer counter T is set to " 0” or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S917, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, Execute transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.
The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1209 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1202 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is not the "highest advantage result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds", it executes the processing from step S1205.

First, the processing (processing after step S1202) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the winning lottery when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high-probability mode flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, explicit small round high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the allocation result ) or clear the special out flag. In addition, step S205 of the winning process for the operation opening described above, step S701 of the fluctuation start process, step S806 of the display duration setting process, step S906 of the game state transition process, and step S906 of the big winning opening opening/closing process. In S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode.

Next, processing (processing after step S1205) when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the sorting result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "high probability result of explicit few rounds" will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result is a "low probability result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (when it determines that the win-or-fail result is the "special failure result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the sorting result is the "low-probability result", it executes the processing after step S1206.

In step S1206, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than a "low-probability result".

In step S1207, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
At step S1208, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. FIG.
In step S1209, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG.
The MPU 62 maintains the number limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64 . After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the winning lottery results in a "jackpot winning" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "most advantageous result" or a "high probability result", the game state is the current state. Regardless of the game state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the game shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state is the opening and closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the round number regulation mode), it shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the "jackpot win" is achieved in the lottery. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the main controller 60, based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 as a trigger, It functions as game state transition means for shifting the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the opening/closing execution mode.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c , speaker unit 24 and display control device 100 .
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which, in addition to the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command to control the VDP 105 . Specifically, MPU 102 controls VDP 105 by generating commands for VDP 105 .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. It is a memory means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 47 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47 . The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 47 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S2001 to S2005, as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the open/close execution mode, and the like. This effect determination processing will be described later in detail.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process in step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and 49a to 49c, and executes sound control of the speaker unit 24. FIG.

In step S<b>2004 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the demonstration command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of various lamp units 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 .

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing in step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether it is time to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 to the display control device 100 , and transmits various commands to the display control device 100 . , the command is transmitted to the display control device 100 .
After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2109 onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability". result”.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2103, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be displayed on the activated line L. When information relating to a combination of symbols having numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low-probability result", the same even-numbered number is displayed as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Information relating to the combination of symbols possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "best result" or "low probability result", in step S2104, based on the content of the type command, the game result is " It is determined whether or not the result is “out of normal result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal failure result", that is, if the game result is either the "special failure result" or the "explicit small round high probability result", step S2105 , the common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the "normal failure result", in step S2106, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of the symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. FIG. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 provides information relating to a combination of symbols different from the above-described combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2107. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. In step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a change start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2103, S2105 and S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. FIG. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 retrieves from the program ROM 103 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 47 based on the variable start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92 . read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the effective line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the processing of step S2108, or when determining in step S2101 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received, the MPU 92 executes processing from step S2109 onward.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processing from step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that an opening command has been received, in step S2110 it determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the opening/closing execution mode effect when it is determined in step S2110 that the game result is the “special loss result”. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. In addition, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . This opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission processing of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After executing the process of step S2112, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the process of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the small winning command is received.

MPU92 performs the process after step S2116, when it determines with having not received the small hit command in step S2113.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the small hit command is received, in step S2114, the MPU 92 executes a process of determining a small hit effect. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command related to the small hit effect determined in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114. And MPU92 memorize|stores a small hit production|presentation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of RAM94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the small winning effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a small winning effect.

MPU92 performs the process after step S2116, after performing the process of step S2115, or when it determines with having not received the small hit command in step S2113.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes processes for advancing the effects for the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, for example. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure results" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in columns and the game states, etc. are arranged in rows.
The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. Result", and a sorting result of "Low Probability Result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 24, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the lottery (symbol x in the figure). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. The contents of the game state and the like are arbitrary.

In the case of the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", the lottery mode does not shift.
In addition, in the "special failure result" of the low probability mode, the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening and closing execution mode is effect A, and in the "special failure result" of the high probability mode, the stop. The result is a combination of special symbols, and a small win performance instead of the performance for the open/close execution mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "clearly limited round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the effect for the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning opening 38a is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode is the effect C or the effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, and the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number. If so, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D.
In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the "best result". can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, so that the game result is the "best result". and "low-probability results" cannot be grasped. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in a "most advantageous result", if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the symbol display device 47 will display the game result. disguised as if it was a "low-probability result".

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage that has been applied as if the game result was a "low-probability result".

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result becomes the "special loss result" after shifting to the high-probability mode.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 25, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to inform the result of the lottery (Fig. 25 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 25(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 25(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 25(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 25(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 25(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
25C, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a (Fig. 25(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. , the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to a closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the remaining plurality of game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning, so that the player can Attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a can hold 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. designed to be able to

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 25(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning drive section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a, Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive section 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

(2) Since the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, it is released from the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.
(3) After setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the variable prize winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big prize winning opening 38a, and sets the door 38b to the closed state. The object 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 can: More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the big winning hole 38a, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and the waiting time for the start of the small winning are set. When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the large prize winning port 38a to the open state, and the vertical distance between the electric role product 37a and the large prize winning port 38a changes the electric role product 37a to the closed state. It was set so that when the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, it reaches the big winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and the start of the small hit When the total waiting time has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to an open state, and adjusts the waiting time for starting the small win. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
As in the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving portion 37b, and, as shown in FIG. and a passage sensor 372 provided on the right side of the guardrail 371 .

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end in contact with the upper right end of the right operation opening 37 and inclined downward toward the right operation opening 37 . A guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. A guard rail 371 is fixed so as to protrude from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 . Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation opening The ball flows down toward the out hole 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The passage sensor 372 is a sensor that detects passage of a game ball, and is provided on the game board 31 along the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to the right end of the guardrail 371 . The width of the passage sensor 372 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the passage sensor 372, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the drawing is detected by the passage sensor 372, and then detected vertically above the electric accessory 37a. The water flows down along the plate surface on the side and the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. In other words, the passage sensor 372 detects the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. The passage sensor 372 may be of any type as long as it can individually detect the passage of game balls. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be employed.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 27, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a and various counter areas 94b.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. Also, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b and the passage sensor 372 . The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands sent from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the winning process for the activation opening, the normal process, and the game state transition process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process for the operation opening, the normal process, and the game state transition process in this embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 28, the process of step S206A is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206A, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory The accessory 37a is set to the closed state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state in step S206A, and then sets the electric role closing command. This electric closing command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the electrical close command set in step S206A to the sound emission control device 90. FIG.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state based on the electrical closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 29, the process of step S306A is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306A, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation port 37. FIG. In this electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product opening lottery based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role product opening lottery. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Then, after the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning in the right operation opening 37, the electric accessory drive unit 37b is driven. Control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state.
Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

Here, in this embodiment, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery in step S306A, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the open state. After that, set the power release command. This electric role release command includes information for making the sound emission control device 90 recognize that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state. The MPU 62 transmits to the audio light emission control device 90 the electrical opening command set in step S306A in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state based on the electric role opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 30, steps S907A and S908A are executed instead of steps S907 and S908.

In step S907A, the MPU 62 executes a waiting time setting process for starting a small winning. In the process of setting the waiting time for starting the small hit, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of 50% as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small win. is set, and "200" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of remaining 50% as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small win. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec or 0.4 sec. It should be noted that the waiting time for starting the small winning is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 is set to "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit with a probability of 50%. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 may be set to "50" as a waiting time (waiting period) for starting a small hit with a different probability.

In step S908A, the MPU 62 sets a small winning command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. This small winning command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and information on the waiting time for starting the small winning. The MPU 62 transmits the small winning command set in step S908A to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of normal processing.
In addition, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, in this embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, timer interrupt processing and effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the timer interrupt processing and effect determination processing in this embodiment will be described.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
In timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device 90, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 executes the game ball counting process of step S2006A after executing the process of step S2001 and before executing the process of step S2002. Differs from one embodiment.

In step S2006A, the MPU 92 executes game ball counting processing. In this game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372 after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. In other words, in the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.
The game ball counting process will be described in detail below.

<Game ball counting process>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game ball counting processing.
In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received an electrical release command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has received the electric power release command, in step S2202 the value of the passage counter PTC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is cleared by substituting 0. do. After that, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process. Here, the value of the passing counter PTC indicates the number of game balls detected by the passing sensor 372 . Therefore, when the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the MPU 92 resets and initializes the value of the passage counter PTC.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the electrical opening command, it reads the state of the passage sensor 372 in step S2203, determines the state, and uses it as passage detection information. Store in RAM 94 . Then, based on the detection result of the passage sensor 372 stored in the RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball has been detected.

When the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball has been detected in step S2203, it adds 1 to the value of the passage counter PTC and updates it in step S2204.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the passage of the game ball has not been detected, it ends the game ball counting process.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing.
In effect determination processing, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2114A and S2115A instead of the processes of steps S2114 and S2115. It is different from the first embodiment in that the closing effect determination process is executed.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes small winning effect determination processing. In this small hit effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the setting processing of the waiting time for starting the small winning in step S907A, the short-term waiting time production is changed to the small winning production. , and when "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the long waiting time performance is selected as the small winning performance.

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2115A, the MPU 92 sets a small hit effect command including information related to the short-term standby time effect or long-term standby time effect selected in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114A. And MPU92 memorize|stores a small hit production|presentation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of RAM94. This small hit effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the short-term waiting time effect or the long-term waiting time effect on the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 47 executes a short-term standby time effect or a long-term standby time effect.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes closing effect determination processing. In this closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines a closing effect to be executed when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
In the following, the closing effect determination processing will be described in detail.

<Production decision processing at the time of closing>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect determination processing at the time of closing.
In the closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it has received an electrical closing command transmitted from the MPU 62.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has received the power closing command, in step S2302 it determines whether or not the value of the passage counter PTC is "3" or more.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is "3" or more, in step S2303, it executes high-expectation effect determination processing.
In this high-expectation-level effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the content of the high-expectation-level effect by referring to a performance table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2304, the MPU 92 sets a high-expectation-level effect command related to the high-expectation-level effect determined in the high-expectation-level effect determination process in step S2304. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the high expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. - 特許庁
This high-expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the high-expectation effect in the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes a high-expectation effect.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is not "3" or more (if it determines that the value of the passage counter PTC is less than "3"), then step S2305 , the process of determining the low-expectation effect is executed. In this low-expectation-degree effect determination process, the MPU 92 selects the contents of the low-expectation-degree effect by referring to the effect table pre-stored in the ROM 93 .

Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the above-described effect execution processing of step S2003 based on the contents of the selected effect.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 sets a low-expectation-level effect command related to the low-expectation-level effect determined in the process of determining the low-expectation-level effect in step S2305. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the low expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 .
This low-expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the above-described command transmission processing of step S2005.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the low expectation performance in the pattern display device 47 based on the low expectation performance command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the low-expectation effect.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
In FIG. 35, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time) It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 35, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to inform the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 35 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 35(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 35(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 35(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 35(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and prompts the player with the character's line "Attention!" It informs that there is a high expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a.

It should be noted that, if the predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball entering the right actuation opening 37, the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has not received the electric closing command. The production (high-expectation-level production and low-expectation-level production) is not executed.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 35(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
35(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102 receives a short-term Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time presentation, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the character's line "You did it!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time presentation informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the prize at the big prize winning opening 38a.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessary 37a, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 35(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 35(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

In FIG. 36, after shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 36, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to inform the result of the lottery (Fig. 36 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 36(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 36(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 36(A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 36(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.

Here, as described above, since there are two game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "2".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the low-expectation effect determination process of step S2305 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the low-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "Attention!" The low expectation of winning is reported to the winning opening 38a.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 36(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
36(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small hit, so the MPU 102 receives a short-term Execute the waiting time production. In the short-term standby time presentation, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47, and also displays the character's line "You did it!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the large winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term waiting time presentation informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the prize at the big prize winning opening 38a.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a is It passes through the electric accessary 37a, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 36(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 36(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

In FIG. 37, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls travel on the board surface of the electric accessory, and the hit/fail result becomes a "special loss result", and the waiting time for the start of the small hit (waiting time) It is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when "200" is set as the period).
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 37, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "best result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to inform the result of the lottery (Fig. 37 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 37(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 37(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 37(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206A based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 37(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation effect determination process of step S2303 in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and prompts the player with the character's line "Attention!" It informs that there is a high expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 37(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
37(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102, based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, long-term Execute the waiting time production. In the long standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 and displays the character's line "I'm sorry!". In addition, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the closed big prize opening 38a. As a result, the long standby time effect informs the player that the expectation of winning the big prize opening 38a is low.

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907A, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 Set "50" or "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, so the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.4 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit. When about 0.5 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling on the board surface of the electric accessory 37a are It passes through the electric accessary 37a and falls so that it cannot win the big prize opening 38a (see FIG. 37(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 opens the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 37(D). As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls to enter the big winning hole 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a are released.
Further, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small win, the variable winning driving section 38c moves the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to the big winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so that the ball can be entered at
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 sets "200" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start of the small winning, the variable winning drive unit 38c moves the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to a large size. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as not to let the ball enter the prize winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a, and the electric A second opening timing is provided for setting the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so as not to allow the game ball B2 released from the accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning opening 38a, and the big winning. Since the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so as not to allow the ball to enter the mouth 38a, the player is released from the electric accessory 37a. The player pays attention to whether or not the game ball B2 that has been played enters the big winning hole 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first opening timing is, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and Although it is set when about 0.2 sec, which is the total time of waiting time for starting a small hit, has passed, it may be set when time other than this has passed. In short, the first opening timing can be set so that the opening/closing door 38b can be set to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning hole 38a.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second opening timing is, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the special display duration and Although it is set when about 0.5 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting a small hit, has passed, it may be set when other time has passed. In short, the second opening timing should be set so that the opening/closing door 38b is opened so as not to allow the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In the pachinko machine 10, after the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, the relay period (special display A setting process (period adjusting means) of waiting time for starting a small hit in step S907A for adjusting the duration time and waiting time for starting a small hit is provided.
According to this, after the player sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, during the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c will pay attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, the period adjusting means selects one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing to adjust the relay period. You may choose to adjust the relay period, or you may set a random time to adjust the relay period.
Further, in the present embodiment, the period adjustment means adjusts the standby time for starting the small winning, and after setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state in the electric role product driving unit 37b, the variable prize driving unit 38c , the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state is adjusted. By adjusting the distance, etc., the relay period may be adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 sets "50" as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small winning, the variable winning drive unit 38c causes the electric accessory drive unit 37b to The opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at the timing when the door 37a is set to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory driving section 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when closing effect determination processing in step S2117A, when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, a predetermined effect (closed effect) is executed. It functions as time production executing means.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the effect determination processing at step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. For example, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player can perform a predetermined effect to determine whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. can be notified to Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the high expectation effect is achieved by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, thereby increasing the number of game balls more than a predetermined number (one in this embodiment). When there is a high degree of expectation that the ball will enter the big winning hole 38a (when the player will be in an advantageous state), it functions as an advantageous state notification performance for notifying the player that the state will be advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the low-expectation performance is achieved by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, thereby allowing more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the big winning opening 38a. It functions as a disadvantageous state notification performance for notifying the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state when the degree of expectation for the player is low (when the player is in a disadvantageous state).

According to this, the effect determination process at the time of step S2117A sets the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, and when the state becomes advantageous for the player, When the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing a high-expectation performance for informing the player of the advantageous state and setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b. In addition, since a low-expectation effect is executed to inform the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, the player should pay attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the closing effect executing means stores information (expectation) regarding whether or not more game balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) enter the big winning opening 38a. Although the player is notified, it may be configured to notify the player of information other than this. For example, the closing effect executing means may notify the player of information regarding whether or not the game ball can enter the big winning opening 38a. In this case, the effect execution means at the time of closing, based on information such as the number of game balls running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the waiting time for the start of the small hit, and the duration of the special display, the game ball can be entered into the big winning hole 38a.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(4) The pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a enters the big winning hole 38a, and the big winning hole 38a. Since the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the player can play the game released from the electric accessory 37a. Attention is paid to whether or not the ball B2 enters the big winning hole 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(5) The electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state and then sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a. In the pachinko machine 10, after the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, the relay period (special display The total time of the duration and the waiting time for the start of the small winning) is provided in step S907A for setting the waiting time for starting the small winning (period adjusting means). After the electric accessary 37a is set to the closed state by 37b, the relay period until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state by the variable winning driving unit 38c will be noted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(6) The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a closing effect determination process in step S2117A for executing a predetermined effect when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. , After setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the player is notified whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player by executing a predetermined effect. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

(7) The effect determination process at the time of closing in step S2117A is an advantageous state for the player by setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b. By executing a high-expectation effect that notifies the player of the state, and setting the electric role product 37a to the closed state by the electric role product driving unit 37b, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, Since the low-expectation-level effect is executed to inform the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A. .
(8) In the closing effect determination process of step S2117A, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, thereby allowing more than a predetermined number of game balls to enter the big winning opening 38a. When the degree of expectation to be made is high, a high expectation performance is executed, and by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory driving part 37b, more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening 38a. Since the low-expectation effect is executed when the degree of expectation for the ball to be entered is low, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination processing in step S2117A.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the right operating port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. was
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the right operation port 37B is a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. ) as an upper electric accessory 37a1, and a lower electric accessory 37a2 as a guide piece (support piece) that is arranged vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and is composed of a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece. It differs from the first embodiment in that it has

In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37B avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The upper electric accessory 37a1 is provided with an inclination so as to descend toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to an upper electric accessory driving portion 37b1 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1. be. The closed state is a state in which the upper electric accessory 37a1 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37B, thereby closing the right operation opening 37B. The open state is a state in which the upper electric accessory 37a1 is advanced toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37B and opening the right operation opening 37B. is.

The lower electric accessory 37a2 is provided inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to the lower electric accessory driving portion 37b2 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. . The lower electric accessory 37a2 is driven by the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 to be in either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state). set. The closed state is a state in which the right operation opening 37B is closed by retracting the lower electric accessory 37a2 toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37B. In the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is advanced toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37B, thereby opening the right operation opening 37B. state.

Here, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls. It will be.
In addition, when the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. I will enter the ball. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. become.
In addition, when the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state, the game ball tilts the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2. The ball is used and enters the right operation opening 37B along this plate surface. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time.
Therefore, when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37B, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory When the accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, it is possible to win the right operation opening 37B.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the open state or may be set to the closed state.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, and a power source/power source for executing shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. and a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may comprise marking means for marking upon its opening and may comprise marking structures for marking upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off because the adhesive layer remains on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61 and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62 . Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an upper electric accessory driving portion 37b1 that opens and closes the upper electric accessory 37a1 of the right operating port 37B, and a lower electric accessory driving portion 37b1 that opens and closes the lower electric accessory 37a2 of the right operating port 37B. It is connected to the item driving section 37b2, the variable winning driving section 38c that opens and closes the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38, the main display section 45, and the accessory display section .

Further, in this embodiment, the main controller 60 executes processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the prize winning process and the normal process for the working opening are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the prize winning process and the normal process for the operating port in this embodiment will be described below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning process for the working opening.
In the winning process for the working opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 40, the process of step S206B is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206B, the MPU 62 executes processing for closing the right opening. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 to drive both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Set to closed state. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S207.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 41, instead of the process of step S306, the process of step S306B for electric support is executed.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes an electric support process for executing drive control of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right actuation opening 37B.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for electric support.
In the electric service support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 executes an electric role release lottery based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 64c of the RAM 64. FIG.

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory open lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the electric accessary product open lottery has not been won, it executes the processing after step S1307.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the electric accessory open lottery is won in step S1302, the upper electric accessory lottery is executed in step S1303. In this upper electric accessory lottery, it is determined whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state when the electric accessory open lottery is won. Specifically, in the upper electric accessory lottery, there is a 50% probability of winning, and the remaining 50% probability of non-winning.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory lottery is won with a probability of 50%, but it may be won with a probability different from 50%.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper electric accessory lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines that the upper electric auditors lottery is won at step S1304, at step S1305, the upper electric auditors open execution process is executed. In this upper electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the upper electric auditors lottery is not won at step S1304, at step S1306, the lower electric auditors open execution process is executed. In this lower electric accessory opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state.

After executing the process of step S1305 or step S1306, and when it is determined that the electric accessary product open lottery is not won in step S1302, the process after step S1307 is executed.
In step S1307, the MPU 62 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 62, for example, after setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, determines that a predetermined time has passed without the game ball winning the right operation opening 37B. If so, drive control of the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 is executed to set both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. Further, for example, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the electronic support process.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the right operating port, the variable prize winning device, and the pattern display device when winning the upper electric accessory lottery because the winning result becomes the "special losing result" after shifting to the high probability mode. be.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 43, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by a two-dot chain line.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "best result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 43 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 43(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37B rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation port 37B has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. When the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is won as a result corresponding to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the upper electric accessory 37a1 provided in the right operation opening 37B is a predetermined It will be in an open state in the form of
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1. (See FIG. 43(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. become. In addition, in FIG. 43(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37B. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 43(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery, sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state when winning the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303, and then operates right. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the mouth 37B.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 43(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, when the result of the lottery is "special loss", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37B, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of stopping, a combination of special symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the sum of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec, which is the time, has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the big winning opening 38a is approximately It is set to reach the big winning opening 38a after 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 43(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. Thus, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously cause the remaining plurality of game balls traveling on the board surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 to enter the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over-winning, so that the player can win. attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 holds 3 to 4 game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. is designed to allow

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 43(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the open/close door 38b, and this plate Since it falls along the surface toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), it cannot win the big prize port 38a.

FIG. 44 shows the right operation port, the variable prize winning device, and the pattern display device when the win/loss result becomes "special loss result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. It is a diagram.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 44, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the right operation port 37B (each electric role product 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by a two-dot chain line.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 44 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 44(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37B rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation port 37B has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. As a result corresponding to the transition to the role open state, if the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303 is not won, as described above, the lower electric accessory 37a2 provided in the right operation port 37B is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. The ball will be entered (see FIG. 44(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 44(A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) running along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206B based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37B. In this closing execution process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 to set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 44(B). . In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory open lottery and sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state when it does not win the upper electric accessory lottery in step S1303, and then , the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37B, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 44(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
44(C), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" Notify that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37B, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of stopping, a combination of special symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the MPU 62 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the special display duration and the waiting time for the start of the small hit When about 0.2 sec, which is the total time, has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the lower electric accessory 37a2 and the big prize opening 38a is such that the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set in a closed state, and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 freely falls. In this case, it is set to reach the big winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining one game ball B2 traveling along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, falls, and can win the big prize opening 38a. (See FIG. 44(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the big winning hole 38a. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37B immediately without taking much time. The electric accessory 37a2 is difficult to hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to a closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. In other words, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is less likely to over-win than the upper electric accessory 37a1.
In addition, in this embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 holds one or two game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. designed to be able to

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 44(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2, and after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this Since it will fall along the board surface toward the out port 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. Then, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state, and then sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B. By doing so, the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 are released, and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then the right operation port By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the 37B, the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 enters the big winning opening 38a, and is released from the lower electric accessory 37a2. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as to enter the game ball B2 that has been hit into the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state. In addition, the variable winning driving section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing when the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric role item 37a1 or the lower electric role item 37a2 to enter the big winning hole 38a, and this game ball B2 A predetermined game ball can be paid out when the ball is entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 has a plate surface on the vertically upper side formed in a flat shape, and is a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a wavy plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof, and can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and has more than the lower electric accessory 37a2. It functions as a second guide piece capable of holding a game ball.
In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 by forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof in a wavy shape. By forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side into a flat shape and applying surface processing to make the game ball less slippery, it may be possible to hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2. In short, the second guide piece only needs to be able to hold more game balls than the first guide piece.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then enter the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the ball, a first open/close state in which the remaining game ball B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and an upper electric accessory After setting the 37a1 to the open state, by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37B, the remaining held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and a second open/close state for releasing the game ball B2.

According to this, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to open and close the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 that can hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to any one of the second open/closed states for opening and closing. By setting, compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.
In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1 sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 to the open state or the closed state, and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 sets the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Alternatively, the closed state is set, but the opening and closing of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set by one drive unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1301 functions as guide piece lottery means for executing a lottery as to whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Then, in the step S306B for electric role support processing, the upper electric accessory is set to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball.

According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the processing for electric support support in step S306B for adjusting the amount of game balls to be held, the amount of game balls to be held is adjusted in the processing for electric support support in step S306B. By adjusting so as to increase, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.
Further, according to this, the process for supporting the electric role in step S306B adjusts the amount of game balls held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets the upper electric accessory to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. The amount of holding the game ball is adjusted by the 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means alternately sets the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state without, for example, based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. You may adjust the amount which holds a game ball with the lower electric accessory 37a2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means is set to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state, thereby allowing the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to play the game. I was adjusting the amount of holding the ball. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece, for example, by configuring the guide piece so that the amount of holding the game ball can be varied. good. In short, the holding amount adjusting means only needs to be able to adjust the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2, so that the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 By setting both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 freely falls to open and close the door. Head to 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the upper electric role item 37a1 or the lower electric role item 37a2 to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the upper electric accessory 37a1 performs a plurality of games that flow down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to hold the ball. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37B while being swayed on this plate surface. is.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. The upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that pachinko. The machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operation port 37B. Although the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the upper electric accessory 37a1 or The lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, then 0 It is sufficient that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is performed when 1 sec has elapsed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operation port 37B. Although the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time were satisfied Based on, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In this case, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state in the upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2. The opening/closing door 38b may be set to the open state in accordance with the timing according to the conditions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric role item 37a1 and the lower electric role item 37a2. As long as it is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the object 37a2, it does not have to be located vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the mouth 38a, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 is released from the upper electric accessory 37a1. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number of balls (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 does not have to be wavy.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive section 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive section 37b2 hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. It also functions as a ball entry assisting means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the variable winning device 38. - 特許庁In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as an auxiliary body positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and drive the upper electric accessory. The portion 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving portion 37b2 drive the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to bring the holding state (open state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2). Alternatively, it functions as an auxiliary driving unit that sets the non-holding state (the closed state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2).
Then, by setting the upper electric role product 37a1 or the lower electric role product 37a2 to the holding state, the electric role product driving unit 37b holds a plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and holds the upper electric role product. By setting both the object 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the non-holding state, it is held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. The game ball B2 is released.

In this embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 are used as the ball entry assist means. Other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(9) The pachinko machine 10 is in a first open/closed state in which the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since the upper electric accessory 37a1 capable of holding more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to any one of the second open/closed states, the second open/closed state is set. As a result, more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening 38a as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 opens and closes, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(10) The upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a1. By setting the accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the amount of game balls held. Since the processing for electric support support of step S306B is provided, by adjusting the amount of game balls to be held in the processing for electric support support of step S306B, the game ball enters the big winning opening 38a. can be made easier. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.
(11) The electric role support process of step S306B adjusts the amount of game balls held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301. The person pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece whose plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. was
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the right operation port 37C has an electric accessory 37a3 as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-shaped movable piece. It is different from the first embodiment in this respect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 31 is arranged vertically above the electric accessory 37a3 with a distance of about one game ball, and the board surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wave shape. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a plate 50 configured by a flat plate-like movable piece.
In addition, the player hits to the right by maximizing the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation opening 37C avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a3 is provided with an inclination so as to descend toward the right operation port 37C, and is connected to the electric accessory driving portion 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. This electric accessory 37a3 is set to either a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) or an open state (supported state or guided state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive section 37b. The closed state is a state in which the electric accessory 37a3 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operation opening 37C, thereby closing the right operation opening 37C. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a3 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the right operation opening 37C and opening the right operation opening 37C. be.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a3 and falls.
Further, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C along the plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3. will do. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time.
Therefore, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the right operation opening 37C, and when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the right operation opening 37C can win a prize.

The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and is connected to a plate driving section 50 a mounted on the back side of the game board 31 . The plate 50 is driven by the plate driving section 50a to repeat the forward and backward states to make a single vibration. The forward state is a state in which the plate 50 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 to protrude from the game board 31, thereby holding game balls flowing down the game area. Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the plate 50 is formed in a wavy shape, the plate 50 can hold the game ball without dropping it. The retracted state is a state in which the plate 50 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area. In this embodiment, the cycle of the simple oscillation of the plate 50 is set to 2 seconds. Also, in this embodiment, the plate 50 is designed to hold 3 to 4 game balls while in the forward state.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 46, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, are integrated into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. is. This RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. FIG. An output port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plate driving section 50a for opening and closing the plate 50. As shown in FIG.
The MPU 92 executes driving control of various lamp units 23 , 49 a to 49 c and the speaker unit 24 based on commands sent from the main control device 60 .
Also, the MPU 92 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning/failing result becomes "special losing result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the game ball wins the big winning opening. is.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 47, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number ("7, 7, 7" in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L to notify the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 47 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 47(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37C rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when it is detected that the right operation port 37C has won a prize, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 47A illustrates a state in which three game balls are held by the plate 50. FIG.
As described above, the plate 50 is in a simple harmonic motion, so it goes into the backward state after being in the forward state. Since the plate 50 does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area by being in the backward state, the game balls held by the plate 50 are dropped as shown in FIG. 47(B). I will continue.

A game ball shot toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central part of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and enters the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on is a result corresponding to the transition to the electric operation open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operation opening 37C is a predetermined It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operation opening 37C along this plate surface. becomes (see FIG. 47(B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 47(B), there are three game balls (B1, B2) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. These three game balls are game balls dropped from the plate 50 .

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 47(C). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high-speed variable period (see FIG. 47(C)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
47(D), the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" Notify that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37C, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small winning. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric role 37a3 and the big prize opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric role 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric role 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the board surface of the electric role product 37a3 pass through the electric role product 37a3, drop down, and enter the big winning hole 38a (Fig. 47(D)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a3 and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

FIG. 48 shows the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the pattern display device when the winning/failing result becomes "special missing result" after shifting to the high probability mode and the game ball does not win the big winning opening. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 48, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning lottery (Fig. 48 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit right, as shown in FIG. 48(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37C rather than the central working opening 36 can be increased.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route flows down the game area and is held by the plate 50 in the forward state. FIG. 48(A) illustrates a state in which one game ball is held by the plate 50. FIG.
As described above, the plate 50 is in a simple harmonic motion, so it goes into the backward state after being in the forward state. Since the plate 50 is in a retracted state, it does not interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area, so the game balls held by the plate 50 drop as shown in FIG. 48(B). I will continue.

A game ball shot toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and enters the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on is the result corresponding to the transition to the electric operation open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a3 provided in the right operation opening 37C is a predetermined It becomes an open state in the mode.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 and enters the right operation opening 37C along this plate surface. becomes (see FIG. 48(B)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed flat, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37C immediately without taking much time. In addition, in FIG. 48(B), there is one game ball (B1) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. This one game ball B1 is a game ball dropped from the plate 50. - 特許庁

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 48(C). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.

Further, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the MPU 102 displays a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92. By starting the variable display of columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the period shifts to the high speed change period (see FIG. 48(C)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, when the lottery results in a "special loss result", the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" Notify that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entrance ball of one game ball B1 to the right operation opening 37C, it shifts to the high-speed fluctuation period, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment) is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small winning. When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric role 37a3 and the big prize opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric role 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric role 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the rest of the game balls traveling on the plate surface of the electric role product 37a3 pass through the electric role product 37a3, drop, and enter the big winning hole 38a. According to this, the electric accessory 37a3 and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a3 starts free fall, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a. However, in the example of FIG. 47, since there is no game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3 and fallen, the game ball cannot enter the big winning hole 38a (see FIG. 48(D)).

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, the electric accessory drive section 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. The remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 are released. In addition, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a3 enters the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the big winning opening 38a, and when the game balls B2 enter, the predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. The game ball B2 released from is free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after setting the electric role product 37a3 to the open state, the electric role product drive unit 37b closes the electric role product 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37C. However, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric role object 37a3, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric role object 37a3. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3.

Further, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a3 functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a3. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a3) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a3).
By setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the holding state, the electric accessory driving section 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the non-holding state. Thus, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a function as holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Specifically, the plate 50 functions as a holding main body positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, and the plate driving section 50a drives the plate 50 to It functions as a holding drive unit that sets the holding state or the non-holding state. Then, the plate drive unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and sets the plate 50 to the non-holding state to play a game that flows down the game area. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released without interfering with the ball.
According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a can make the electric accessory 37a3 reliably hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plate driving unit 50a is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the plate 50 so as to generate simple oscillation. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configuration of the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a.

In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is positioned upstream of the flow path of the game balls held by the electric accessory 37a3, but the plate 50 is located upstream of the flow path of the game balls held by the electric accessory 37a3. It does not have to be located upstream. In short, the variable prize winning device may be provided with an opening/closing door located downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the plate 50 has a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 (the number of game balls excluding the game balls that entered the right operation opening 37C) is greater than a predetermined number of game balls. A game ball can be held. The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal surface, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball can be placed on this plate surface. This is because it will be held without falling.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a, Since the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 has a large winning opening. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into 38a, and to make it easier to win an over prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as (1) and (2) in the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(12) The plate driving unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 to the holding state, and sets the plate 50 to the non-holding state to make the game area flow down. The game balls held by the plate 50 are released without interfering with the game balls. According to this, the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a can make the electric accessory 37a3 reliably hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area.

(13) By driving the plate 50, the plate driving section 50a is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state so as to generate a single vibration, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate the plate 50 and the plate driving section 50a. The configuration can be simplified.
(14) After setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a, and the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is greater than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine 10 can hold the game balls at the big winning opening 38a. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, and to make it easier to win an over prize. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 traveling on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning hole 38a. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, drop, and enter the big winning opening 38a. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the right actuation opening and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
The right actuation port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving portion 37b, as in the first embodiment. In addition, as shown in FIG. It has a guardrail 371 provided and a general prize winning opening 35D provided vertically below the electric accessory 37a. In addition, in this embodiment, the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a are provided at positions offset vertically upward compared to the first embodiment. Further, in this embodiment, the cover 381 is formed in a shape that matches the offset of the right operating port 37 and the electric accessory 37a.

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end in contact with the upper right end of the right operation opening 37 and inclined downward toward the right operation opening 37 . A guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guardrail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half of the electric accessory 37a. A guard rail 371 is fixed so as to protrude from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22 . Therefore, a game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation opening The ball flows down toward the out hole 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. In addition, a game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball that has passed through the flow path indicated by the arrow B in the figure, can reach the board surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side or the opening/closing door 38b on the vertically upper side. It will flow down along the plate surface of the
Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guardrail 371 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, the guardrail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.

The general winning opening 35D is provided on the game board 31 so as to be positioned vertically below the guardrail 371. As shown in FIG. In other words, the general winning hole 35D reaches directly below the guardrail 371 (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) among the game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. A game ball is provided at a position where the ball is entered by setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. Of the game balls that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball that reaches the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. As a result, it falls toward the opening/closing door 38b of the big winning opening 38a avoiding the general winning opening 35D.

Further, in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 35, and the ball enters the variable winning device 38. In some cases, 15 prize balls were paid out.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the payout of 15 prize balls when the balls enter the general prize winning openings 35 and 35D, and the ball enters the variable prize winning device 38. It is different from the first embodiment in that ten prize balls are paid out when a is generated.

<About the flow after shifting to high probability mode>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the win/fail result is the "special loss result" after shifting to the high-probability mode.
It should be noted that the high-probability mode shifts to the "jackpot win" in the winning lottery, and when the lottery is sorted into the "explicit small round high-probability result" or "best result" in the distribution lottery.
In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. 50, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

First, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 starts to variably display a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. Transition to a variable period. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
Then, in the case of "big win winning" in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" in the distribution lottery, the MPU 102, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7, 7, 7” in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery (Fig. 50 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a right-pointing arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 50(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits to the right by maximizing the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area to the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit part is formed. By shifting from the side to the opposite side, the probability of winning the right working opening 37 can be increased over the central working opening 36 .
When it is detected that a prize has been entered into the right operating port 37, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of game balls. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can advance the game advantageously by shooting the game ball toward the right-handed route.

A game ball launched toward the right-handed route enters a through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of an internal lottery performed based on the winning through this through gate 41 is electronically displayed. If the result corresponds to the transition to the role open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right actuation opening 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 along this plate surface using the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. becomes (see FIG. 50(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball takes time to enter the right operation opening 37 while being swayed on this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 50(A), there are three game balls (B1, B21, B22) running on the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing of the right working opening of step S206 based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. FIG. In this closing execution process of the right operation opening, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive section 37b to set the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 50(B). In other words, in the high probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, thereby realizing a high-speed display. It shifts to the variable period (see FIG. 50(B)). During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) to start the variable display of symbols.
50(C), the MPU 102 receives the stop result command from the MPU 92 after the high-speed fluctuation period elapses. , a special symbol combination ("3, 4, 1" in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the pattern display device 47 based on the small winning effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the character's line "You did it!" It notifies that the result is a "special outlier result".

In the "special loss result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 38a is executed twice in a short period of time. In this opening/closing number regulation mode, a predetermined total number of times (two times in this embodiment) the opening and closing of the large winning opening 38a are executed, or a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls wins in the big prize opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S806 that the winning/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S807 that the special Read display duration. Then, when the MPU 62 reads out the special display duration, it sets the special display duration (0.1 sec in this embodiment) to the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 . Therefore, based on the entry of one game ball B1 into the right operating port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period occurs, and as a result of stopping, a special combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1" in this embodiment). is stopped on the activated line L, the time until the result of the lottery is notified is about 0.1 sec.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for the start. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small winning is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37, the total time of the special display duration and the standby time for starting the small hit When about 0.2 sec has passed, the MPU 62 sets the big winning opening 38a to the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state and the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a falls freely. It is set so as to reach the big winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the board surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to enter the big winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 50(C)). According to this, the electric accessory 37a and the big winning opening 38a are separated by a predetermined distance, so that the player, after the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a starts to fall freely, The player can play the game while enjoying the process of reaching the big winning opening 38a and whether or not the player wins the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B21 that reaches the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is By setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning hole 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when the balls enter the general prize winning openings 35 and 35D.
On the other hand, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball B22 that reaches the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a By setting 37a to the closed state, the player avoids the general winning opening 35D and enters the big winning opening 38a. Then, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize winning device 38.例文帳に追加

After that, the MPU 62 closes the big winning opening 38a as shown in FIG. 50(D). As a result, the other game ball B shot toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and this plate surface Since the ball falls toward the out port 39 along the path (see FIG. 2), the prize cannot be won in the big prize port 38a.

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. The remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning driving section 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state so that the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a enter the big winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a. Predetermined game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a. The game balls B21 and B22 released from are free-falling toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a to enter the big winning hole 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a releases a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in this embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. This is because the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball enters the right operation opening 37 over time while being swayed on this plate surface. be.
According to this, the variable winning driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a. The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that pachinko can be used. The machine 10 can enter more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning hole 38a, and can facilitate over winning. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the attention of the player to the game.

In the present embodiment, after setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state, the electric accessory drive unit 37b closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive section should set the guide piece to the open state and then set the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. When setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec elapses after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It is sufficient that the display is terminated and the stop display is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory drive unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a to the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation opening 37. However, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, if the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state in accordance with the timing according to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the open/close door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the electric accessory 37a. If so, it does not have to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a "special loss result" instead of a "big win", the variable prize driving unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to an open state, and then the big prize. The open/close door 38b is set to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls into the opening 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is operated to release the game ball released from the electric accessory 37a. A plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held such that the number (two in this embodiment) is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a does not have to be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entry of the game ball into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b drives the electric accessory 37a. By driving, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory drive unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1, B21, and B22 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a to the holding state, and changes the electric accessory 37a to the non-holding state. By setting, the game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory drive unit 37b are employed as the ball entry assistance means, but other mechanical elements may be employed. In other words, the ball-entering assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball-entering means (central operating port 36 and right operating port 37). In short, it is sufficient that the auxiliary body part can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous side holding position (the Left half of the plate surface) and the disadvantageous holding position (electric accessory 37a right half of the plate surface). Specifically, the advantageous holding position is advantageous to the player by entering a predetermined number (15 in this embodiment) of game balls into the general winning opening 35D. Guided to the path, the disadvantageous side holding position is, when the game ball is entered, the number of game balls less than the predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) game balls are put out into the big winning opening 38a, It is designed to lead the player to a path that is disadvantageous.

According to this, the electric role product 37a, when releasing the remaining game ball in the electric role product driving unit 37b, the advantageous side holding position leading to the route that is advantageous for the player, and the electric role product driving unit 37b When releasing the remaining game balls in , it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b. can be improved.

In addition, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to an advantageous path by making the ball enter the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the game ball. When the ball is entered, the player is guided to a path disadvantageous to the player by making the ball enter the big winning hole 38a that pays out less game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the player can drive the electric accessory. When the remaining game ball is released at section 37b, the position of that game ball will be further noted.
In other words, when the electric accessory drive unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the electric accessory 37a is in an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D different from the big winning opening 38a. , the pachinko machine 10, of the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a, enters the game ball in the advantageous side holding position into the general winning hole 35D different from the big winning hole 38a. When the game balls are entered, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b.

In the present embodiment, the advantageous side holding position leads the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the ball to enter the general prize winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side. The holding position guides the player to a disadvantageous path by causing the ball to enter the big winning opening 38a that pays out fewer game balls than a predetermined number when the game ball enters. In other words, the advantageous side holding position and the disadvantageous side holding position create paths that are advantageous and disadvantageous to the player by making the number of game balls to be put out different.

On the other hand, for example, the advantageous side holding position may be guided to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the ball to enter the V winning hole that triggers the transition to the opening and closing execution mode when the game ball enters. . In short, the advantageous side holding position should be a position that can guide the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the guide piece. Any position is acceptable as long as it can lead to a path that is disadvantageous to the player when the remaining game balls are released by the drive unit.

According to this embodiment, substantially the same effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and in addition, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(15) The electric accessory 37a, when releasing the remaining game balls by the electric accessory driving section 37b, is held in an advantageous side holding position that leads to a route that is advantageous for the player, and When releasing the remaining game balls, it has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path disadvantageous to the player rather than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b. can be improved.
(16) The advantageous side holding position guides the player to an advantageous path by making the ball enter the general prize winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball is entered, and the disadvantageous side holding position is When the game balls enter, the game balls are put out in a number less than a predetermined number of game balls, and by making the balls enter the big winning opening 38a, the players are led to a disadvantageous path, so that the players can use the electric accessories. When the remaining game balls are released by the driving portion 37b, the positions of the game balls are further focused.

(17) When the electric accessory drive unit 37b releases the remaining game balls, the electric accessory 37a sets the advantageous side holding position that leads to the path for entering the ball into the general winning opening 35D, which is different from the big winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 enters the game balls in the advantageous side holding position among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a into the general winning hole 35D different from the big winning hole 38a. When the game balls are entered, more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the electric accessory drive section 37b.

[Modification of each embodiment]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes modifications, improvements, etc. within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes opening and closing of the big winning hole 38a once per round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may open and close the big winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or the game to the big winning opening 38a When the total winning number of balls reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the door 38b is closed again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the open/close door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches eight, which is the predetermined upper limit number. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes when the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger port for setting the opening/closing door 38b to a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, this end trigger port is provided. It may be configured to allow the ball to enter the trigger hole.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, and the opening/closing door 38b is closed again. was set to On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 opens the opening/closing door 38b when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the winning to the big winning opening 38a occurs. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state. On the other hand, for example, after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the firing cycle of the game ball and less than or equal to n times (n=1, 2, or 3) the firing cycle of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of open/close execution modes.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed twice with the upper limit duration of the short-time mode, and an opening/closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times with the upper limit duration of the long-time mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening and closing execution mode different from these regarding the form of the upper limit duration time and the number of round game executions. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 differs in the mode of the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes, by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b, such as half-opening or full-opening. , a configuration in which a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the form of the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact form of the upper limit duration is different, although the form appears to be the same from the player's point of view.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from a plurality of types of effects by lottery or the like. , and the selection rate may be changed according to the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 finally stops displaying on the pay line L when the game result is either the "special loss result" or the "explicit small round high probability result". As a result, information relating to a special symbol combination was determined, and this special symbol combination was the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot generation lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery when the jackpot is generated. On the other hand, when a big win occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery of the type of the big win. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM64.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result" and the "normal loss result", and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. A lottery for generating a big hit is executed by comparing the success/failure table and the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery for the "special losing result". On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 to execute the lottery related to the "special loss result". A lottery related to "result" may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, the value of the random number that becomes the "special loss result" is two, and the occurrence of the big win. In the game state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to during the lottery, there were 551 random numbers for the "special loss result". In other words, the probability of a "special failure result" is set higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of a "special outlier result" may be set to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, and set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. may have been Also, the probability of the "special failure result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates advantageous game states and disadvantageous game states for the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the states, the player may create favorable and unfavorable playing states. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player by varying the number of game rounds for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create an advantageous game state and a disadvantageous game state for the player depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game rounds in which the high-probability mode is continued after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. .

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the pending information related to the central working opening 36 in the first result display holding area Ra, and stores the pending information related to the right working opening 37 in the second result display section By storing the information in the reserved area Rb, the reserved information regarding the central operating port 36 and the reserved information regarding the right operating port 37 are separately stored. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the holding information concerning the central working opening 36 and the holding information concerning the right working opening 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the right operation opening 37 for completing the game round regardless of whether or not there is the reservation information related to the central operation opening 36. . On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the reservation information related to the central operation port 36 and the reservation information related to the right operation port 37 for completion of game rounds in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 transmits a command to the audio light emission control device 90, and the audio light emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. The control of the display control device 100 was executed by. In response to this, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the sound emission control device 90, thereby performing sound emission control. Control of device 90 may be performed. The commands sent from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60 .

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the effects for game rounds are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, and are optional. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game cycle by operating a combination of a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for a game round by operating a combination of light-emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 . Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute a game round effect by combining these decorative members and light emitting means with the pattern display device 47 to operate.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and sorting lottery) based on the winning in the central actuation opening 36 or the right actuation opening 37, and then the main display section 45 And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the prize winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the pattern display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the start of the variable display may display the results of In this case, after starting the variable display, before stopping the variable display, an internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may be made unidentifiable.
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to include the main display section 45 .

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operation port 36 or the right operation port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for a game cycle is executed on the display screen G.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute an effect for a game round on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the pattern display device 47 displays a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in the predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in the predetermined area may be variably displayed or may not be displayed during the variably displayed symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may employ letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish, or may employ a combination of these. In addition, even if characters, colors, and patterns that are difficult for the player to identify are not used, mutually similar patterns or combinations thereof may be used to make it difficult for the player to identify. According to this, the administrator of the game parlor, for example, looks at the pattern display device 47 without looking at the main display section 45 at the end of the game round, in the same way as in the case of winning a big win lottery. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the behavior of .

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 was configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a game machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and information on the optical code is transmitted to a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The game machine may be configured so that the information of the game machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at the , and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the information of the web server can be received by the player accessing the website and entering the password issued by operating the button etc. provided on the gaming machine into the gaming machine. You may

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been exemplified and explained as the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine of another type different from the pachinko machine 10. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured such that when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Also, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or other types of gaming machines such as majang ball machines.

[Group of Inventions Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A> Characteristic A1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. accessories 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning slot.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable prize winning driving part sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the big prize winning opening. do.
In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 or feature A2 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece a second open/closed state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group, the game machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving portion, a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A game machine characterized by having

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released. In addition, when the guide piece driving portion releases the remaining game balls, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls at the advantageous side holding position leading to the path that is advantageous for the player and the guide piece driving portion. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving part, so that the game machine increases the player's attention to the game. be able to.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature B Group> Feature B1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (central operation opening 36 and right operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 38),
A ball entry assisting means that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and assists the game balls entering the variable winning device,
The ball entry assistance means includes:
Auxiliary main bodies (electric accessories 37a, 37a3 and upper electric accessories 37a1) located upstream of the flow path of game balls entering the variable winning device;
An auxiliary drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b and upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the auxiliary main unit,
The auxiliary drive unit
By setting the auxiliary main body in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the auxiliary main body in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. Release the game ball held by the auxiliary main body in this way,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
The flow of game balls passing through the auxiliary main body has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter. an opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the path;
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The auxiliary body part is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary body part is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. game machine.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the auxiliary main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine can be greatly improved. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the winning hole, and over winning can be facilitated.
Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The variable winning driving unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main unit enters the big winning opening.

According to feature B2 of the group of the present invention, the variable winning driving unit sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main unit enters the big winning hole, so that the game machine can More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered into the winning hole, and over winning can be facilitated.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the auxiliary main body.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the auxiliary main body, and is released from the auxiliary main body by setting the auxiliary main body to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving section. The game ball thus dropped will freely fall toward the opening/closing door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the game ball held by the auxiliary main body to enter the big winning hole.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the auxiliary main body portion to enter the big winning hole;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the auxiliary body portion to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature B4 of the group of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the auxiliary main body enters the big winning opening, and a big winning. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth, the player is expected to catch the game ball released from the auxiliary main body. Attention will be paid to whether or not the ball enters the big winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B4 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary main body is
a first auxiliary main body (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second auxiliary body portion (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first auxiliary body portion,
The auxiliary drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first auxiliary body portion to the open state, the game ball held by the first auxiliary body portion is released by setting the first auxiliary body portion to the closed state. 1 auxiliary open/close state;
After setting the second auxiliary main body portion to the open state, by setting the second auxiliary main body portion to the closed state, the game ball held by the second auxiliary main body portion is released. 2 auxiliary open/close states,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first auxiliary opening/closing state or the second auxiliary opening/closing state.

According to feature B5 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine has a first auxiliary opening/closing state in which a first auxiliary main body capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and the game area flows down. A second auxiliary main body part capable of holding a plurality of game balls and capable of holding a larger number of game balls than the first auxiliary main body part is set to any one of the second auxiliary open/closed states for opening and closing. By setting the second auxiliary opening/closing state, more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting the first auxiliary opening/closing state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second auxiliary main body is opened or closed, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that it comprises closing effect execution means (closing time effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit. .

According to feature B6 of the group of the present invention, the game machine is provided with closing effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary driving unit. After the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined effect. can. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary main body is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit;
Having a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit. A game machine characterized by

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the auxiliary drive unit sets the auxiliary main unit to the holding state and then sets the auxiliary main unit to the non-holding state, whereby the game ball held by the auxiliary main unit is release the In addition, the auxiliary main body has an advantageous side holding position that leads to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary driving section, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the auxiliary driving section. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the auxiliary drive unit, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. .

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Characteristic group C> Characteristic C1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. Accessory 37a);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The game machine is
After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, period adjustment means for adjusting the relay period until the opening and closing door is set to the open state by the variable prize winning drive unit (small win in step S907A A gaming machine characterized by comprising a waiting time setting process for starting.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. The game machine is provided with a period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period from when the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the variable prize winning driving section sets the open/close door to the open state. , the relay period can be adjusted by the period adjusting means so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning hole. According to this, the player pays attention to the relay period from when the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the closed state to when the opening/closing door is set to the open state by the variable prize winning driving section. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The period adjusting means adjusts the relay period by setting the opening/closing door to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing. .

According to the feature C2 of the group of inventions, the period adjustment means includes a first opening timing for setting the open/close door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning opening, and a big winning. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter the mouth, the player can easily see that the game ball released from the guide piece is large. Attention will be paid to whether or not the ball enters the winning hole. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature C3 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature C1 to feature C3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, the holding main body is positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5 of the invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with closing performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece driving portion, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature D Group> Feature D1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is entered. A game comprising a game state transition means (main controller 60) for transitioning a game state, and a variable prize winning device (variable prize winning device 38) for shifting to a state in which a game ball can be entered when shifting to the specific control state. A machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means
A guide piece (upper side) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. the electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece (processing for electric support support in step S306B).

According to feature D1 of the group of the present invention, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. Since the game machine is provided with holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of game balls to be held, by adjusting the holding amount adjusting means to increase the amount of game balls to be held, a large winning opening can be achieved. It is possible to make it easier to enter a game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
Guide piece lottery means (process of step S1301) for executing lottery as to whether or not to set the guide piece to the open state;
The holding amount adjusting means is
A game machine, wherein the amount of a game ball held by said guide piece is adjusted based on the lottery result of said guide piece lottery means.

According to feature D2 of the group of the present invention, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means. will pay attention to the results of the lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state, the game ball held by the first guide piece is released a first opening and closing. state and
Second opening/closing for releasing the game ball held by the second guide piece by setting the second guide piece to the closed state after setting the second guide piece to the open state. state and
The game machine, wherein the holding amount adjusting means sets the state to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature D3 of the group of the present invention, the holding amount adjusting means is in the first open/closed state in which the first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and the game area is allowed to flow down. A second guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls and capable of holding a larger number of game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second open/closed states for opening and closing the second guide piece. By setting to the open/closed state of , more game balls can be entered into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning slot.

According to feature D4 of the group of the present invention, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the big winning opening, so that the game machine can win a big winning. To surely enter a game ball into the mouth.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature D7 of the group of inventions, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7 of the invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. The game ball held by the holding body part can be released without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9 of the invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature D10 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position.
Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece drive section, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature group E> Feature E1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. Based on the starting ball entry means (central operation opening 36 and right operation opening 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the starting ball entry means as a trigger, it is advantageous for the player. A game state transition means (main controller 60) that shifts the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device that shifts to a state where game balls can enter when the specific control state is changed A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a variable winning device 38),
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body (plate 50);
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. release the game ball held by the holding main body,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
The flow of game balls that have passed through the holding main body has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area are not allowed to enter. an opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the path;
A gaming machine comprising a variable prize winning drive section (variable prize winning drive section 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the open/close door.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the open/close door of the variable winning device is positioned downstream of the flow path of the game balls that have passed through the holding main body. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can make it easier for a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area to enter the big winning hole.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The game machine is characterized in that the holding driving section is set to generate a simple vibration by driving the holding main body section so as to repeat a holding state and a non-holding state.

According to the feature E2 of the group of the present invention, the holding drive section is set to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state by driving the holding main body section so as to make a simple vibration, so that the game machine is equipped with the holding means. configuration can be simplified.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the holding main body.

According to feature E3 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the holding main body, and is released from the holding main body by setting the holding main body to the non-holding state by the holding driving section. The game ball thus dropped will freely fall toward the opening/closing door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the game ball held by the holding body portion to enter the big winning hole.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
The holding body portion is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding body portion is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. game machine.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the holding main body can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body is greater than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine can be greatly improved. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the winning hole, and to make it easier to make an over-winning. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that

<Feature group F> Feature F1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed,
The lottery means
A guide piece (electric accessory) capable of holding a game ball flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state not allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the lottery means 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a closing effect execution means (closed effect determination process in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. Amusement machine.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the game machine is provided with the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the invention group,
When the game player is in an advantageous state by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit, the closing effect executing means is arranged to notify the player that the game player will be in an advantageous state. , and by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, the player can This game machine is characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification performance (low-expectation performance) for informing a player of a disadvantageous state.

According to the feature F2 of the group of the present invention, the closing effect execution means is advantageous to the player when the state is advantageous to the player by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving section. By executing an advantageous state informing performance for informing the player of the state, and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the game is disadvantageous to the player when the state becomes unfavorable to the player. Since the unfavorable state notification performance is executed to notify the player that the game will be in such a state, the player pays attention to the predetermined performance executed by the closing performance executing means.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for shifting the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lottery means. a device 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The variable winning drive unit
setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The closing effect execution means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, so that when there is a high expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening By executing an advantageous state notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning hole is low. This game machine is characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification performance.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released, and the variable prize winning driving part sets the open/close door to an open state so that the game balls released from the guide pieces enter the big prize winning opening. do.
In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can cause the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning opening, and can pay out predetermined game balls when the game balls enter. . Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

In addition, the closing performance executing means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive section, thereby providing an advantageous state when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning opening is high. By executing the notification performance and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the disadvantageous state notification performance is performed when the expectation that more game balls than a predetermined number enter the big winning hole is low. Since it is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect executing means.

Feature F4.
In the game machine described in feature F3 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature F4 of the group of the present invention, the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, so that the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the rest of the game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature F5.
In the game machine described in feature F3 or feature F4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature F5 of the group of inventions, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F3 to F5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow a game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece and a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature F9 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving section sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. . Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position leading to an advantageous path for the player when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, and an advantageous side holding position when the game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion. It has a disadvantageous side holding position leading to a path more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, when the player releases the game ball by the guide piece driving portion, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball, so that the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game. can.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operating port, there are an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and entered into the operating port, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game region is not allowed to enter the operating port. and a guide piece driving part for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonously set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving section, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature G Group> Feature G1.
A shooting means (shooting handle 27) for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, a game ball flowing down the game area is entered, and an internal lottery is performed when the game ball enters. A game machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a lottery means (right operation port 37) to be executed,
The lottery means
A guide piece (electrically driven) which can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means. accessories 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2);
A guide piece drive unit (electric accessory drive unit 37b, upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to an open state, and then sets the guide piece to a closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. Release the remaining game balls held by
The guide piece is
an advantageous side holding position (the left half of the board surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
a disadvantageous side holding position (right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece driving portion; A game machine characterized by having

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the open state, and then sets the guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released. In addition, when the guide piece driving part releases the remaining game balls, the guide piece releases the remaining game balls at the advantageous side holding position leading to the path that is advantageous for the player and the guide piece driving part. In some cases, there is a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving part, so that the game machine increases the player's attention to the game. be able to.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the invention group,
The advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by allowing the ball to enter a prize winning opening that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball enters, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the game ball. A game machine characterized by leading a player to a disadvantageous path by causing a ball to enter a prize winning opening for putting out less than a predetermined number of game balls when entering the ball.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the advantageous side holding position guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player by causing the game ball to enter the payout opening for paying out a predetermined number of game balls, and is disadvantageous. The side holding position guides the player to a disadvantageous path by causing the game balls to enter the winning hole for paying out less game balls than a predetermined number when entering the game balls, so that the player can: When the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion, the position of the game ball is further noted.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the invention group,
Game state transition means (main control) for shifting the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed with the entry of the game ball into the lottery means. device 60);
A variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The variable winning device is
a large winning opening (large winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit (variable winning driving unit 38c) that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece is
The disadvantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a path for entering the big winning hole when the remaining game ball is released by the guide piece driving portion;
When the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive section, the advantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a winning opening (general winning opening 35D) different from the big winning opening (general winning opening 35D)
The variable winning drive unit
The game machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece and held at the disadvantage side holding position is allowed to enter the big winning hole.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece and held at the disadvantageous side holding position enters the big winning opening. In other words, the variable prize-winning drive section sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the game machine can make the game ball in the holding position on the disadvantageous side out of the remaining game balls held by the guide piece enter the big winning opening, and when the game ball enters the A predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Further, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position that guides the ball to a winning opening different from the big winning opening when the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece driving portion. , among the remaining game balls held by the guide piece, the game balls in the advantageous side holding position can be entered into a winning opening different from the big winning opening. More game balls can be paid out than the game balls of . Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball by the guide piece drive section.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, the game ball is released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state with the guide piece drive section. will free-fall toward the open/close door. Therefore, the gaming machine can make it easier for the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces to enter the big winning hole.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G3 or feature G4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
After setting the opening and closing door to an open state, setting the opening and closing door to a closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening,
A game characterized in that the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is greater than the predetermined number of game balls. machine.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive section sets the opening/closing door to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the big winning opening. , the guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the game machine is a large winning opening. More game balls than the predetermined number of game balls can be entered at the same time, and over winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit
a first opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
a second opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so as not to allow the game ball released from the guide piece to enter the big winning slot;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state at one of the first opening timing and the second opening timing.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes a first opening timing mechanism for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that a game ball released from the guide piece is allowed to enter the big winning opening, and a big winning opening. Since the opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening timings for setting the opening/closing door to the open state so as not to let the ball enter, the game ball released from the guide piece wins a big prize for the player. Pay attention to whether the ball enters the mouth or not. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
a first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive unit (upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 and lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2)
After setting the first guide piece to the open state, by setting the first guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the first a first open/close state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces are released;
After setting the second guide piece to the open state, by setting the second guide piece to the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, the second guide piece and a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide pieces,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is set to either the first open/close state or the second open/close state.

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of balls flowing down the game area. Since the second guide piece capable of holding game balls and capable of holding more game balls than the first guide piece is set to any one of the second opening and closing states for opening and closing, the second opening and closing is performed. By setting it to the state, it is possible to enter more game balls into the big winning opening as compared with the case of setting to the first open/closed state. Therefore, since the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G7 of the present invention group,
A holding means capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means are
a holding body portion (plate 50) positioned upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece;
a holding driving unit (plate driving unit 50a) that sets a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the holding body unit;
The holding drive unit
By setting the holding main body part in a holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding main body part in a non-holding state, the game balls flowing down the game area do not interfere with each other. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball held by the holding main body is released in this way.

According to feature G8 of the present invention group, the holding main body is located upstream of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. The holding driving section holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding main body section to the holding state, and sets the holding main body section to the non-holding state to flow down the game area. To release a game ball held by a holding main body without interfering with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can reliably hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature G9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closing effect execution means (closing effect determination processing in step S2117A) for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, the game machine includes the effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. After setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece driving part, the player can be informed of whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player by executing a predetermined performance. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, since it is possible to improve the attention of the player to the game, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known. For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
By the way, as one type of such an operating port, there are an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be held and entered into the operating port, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game region is not allowed to enter the operating port. and a guide piece driving part for setting an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonously set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece driving section, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.
<Others>
Conventionally, a shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board is provided, and an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed by entering a game ball into an operation opening (starting ball entry means). A game machine that executes is known (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). For example, when winning a jackpot lottery, the gaming machine shifts the game state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.
However, since the variable winning device pays out predetermined game balls when the game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, the game ball payout becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is reduced. There is a problem that
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the attention of the player to the game.
<Means>
The gaming machine of the present technical idea includes shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and entering a game ball flowing down the game area. A lottery means for executing an internal lottery, and a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means. and a variable prize winning device that shifts to a state in which game balls can enter when shifting to a specific control state, wherein the lottery means is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. , a guide piece having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means, and a guide for setting the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece. The variable prize winning device includes a single driving portion, a large prize winning port for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters, an open state for allowing the game ball flowing down the game area to enter the big winning port, and a game An opening/closing door which has a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the area is not allowed to enter and which is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball passing through the guide piece, and by driving the opening/closing door, the opening state or the closed state is established. The guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the open state and then sets the guide piece to the closed state, thereby releasing the game ball held by the guide piece. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece.
<effect>
According to this technical idea, the gaming machine can increase the attention of the player to the game.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

10... Pachinko machine 35... General winning opening 36... Upper operating opening 37... Lower operating opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving section 39... Out mouth, 47... pattern display device, 60... main control device, 62... MPU, 90... sound emission control device,
92...MPU, 100...Display control device, 102...MPU.

Claims (1)

A shooting means for shooting game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board, and a lottery means for making the game balls flowing down the game area enter and executing an internal lottery when the game balls enter. a game state transition means for shifting the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player based on the result of an internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the lottery means;
A gaming machine comprising a variable prize winning device that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when shifting to the specific control state,
The lottery means
a guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state not allowing the game balls flowing down the game area to enter the lottery means;
a guide piece driving unit that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device is
a big prize winning port for paying out a predetermined game ball when the game ball enters;
It has an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area enter the big winning opening and a closed state in which game balls flowing down the game area do not enter, and a flow path for game balls passing through the guide pieces. an opening/closing door located downstream of the
A variable winning driving unit that sets an open state or a closed state by driving the opening and closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to an open state and then sets the guide piece to a closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The game machine is
A gaming machine comprising holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of the game ball held by the guide piece.

Images